Anda di halaman 1dari 341

CSC-211

Multifunction Protection IED


Technical Application Manual

CSC-211 Multifunction
Protection IED
Technical Application Manual
Compiled: Jin Rui
Checked: Hou Changsong
Standardized: Li Lianchang

Inspected: Cui Chenfan

Version V1.01
Doc.Code0SF.451.085(E)
Issued Date2012.8.31

VersionV1.01
Doc. Code: 0SF.451.085(E)
Issued Date2012.8
Copyright owner: Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd

Note: the company keeps the right to perfect the instruction. If equipment does not agree with
the instruction at anywhere, please contact our company in time. We will provide you with
corresponding service.

is registered trademark of Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd.


We reserve all rights to this document, even in the event that a patent is issued and a different
commercial proprietary right is registered. Improper use, in particular reproduction and
dissemination to third parties, is not permitted.
This document has been carefully checked. If the user nevertheless detects any errors, he is
asked to notify us as soon as possible.
The data contained in this manual is intended solely for the IED description and is not to be
deemed to be a statement of guaranteed properties. In the interests of our customers, we
constantly seek to ensure that our products are developed to the latest technological standards
as a result it is possible that there may be some differences between the hardware/software
product and this information product.
Manufacturer:
Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd.
Tel: +86 10 62962554, +86 10 62961515 ext. 8998
Fax: +86 10 82783625
Email: sf_sales@sf-auto.com
Website: http://www.sf-auto.com
Add: No.9, Shangdi 4th Street, Haidian District, Beijing, P.R.C.100085

Preface
Purpose of this manual
This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into
service of IED CSC-211. In particular, one will find:

Information on how to configure the IED scope and a description of the


IED functions and setting options;

Instructions for mounting and commissioning;

Compilation of the technical specifications;

A compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the


Appendix.

Target audience
This manual mainly face to installation engineer, commissioning engineer and
operation engineer with perfessional electric and electrical knowledge, rich
experience in protection function, using protection IED, test IED, responsible
for the installation, commissioning, maintenance and taking the protection
IED in and out of normal service.

Applicability of this manual


This manual is valid for CSC-211 multifunction protection IED.

Technical support
In case of further questions concerning the CSC family, please contact
SiFang compay or your local SiFang representative.

Safety information

Strictly follow the company and international safety regulations.


Working in a high voltage environment requires serious approch to
aviod human injuries and damage to equipment

Do not touch any circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal

voltages and currents are present

Avoid to touching the circuitry when covers are removed. The IED
contains electirc circuits which can be damaged if exposed to static
electricity. Lethal high voltage circuits are also exposed when covers
are removed

Using the isolated test pins when measuring signals in open circuitry.
Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present

Never connect or disconnect wire and/or linker to or from IED during


normal operation. Dangerous voltages and currents are present.
Operation may be interrupted and IED and measuring circuitry may
be damaged

Always connect the IED to protective earth regardless of the


operating conditions. Operating the IED without proper earthing may
damage both IED and measuring circuitry and may cause injuries in
case of an accident.

Do not disconnect the secondary connection of current transformer


without short-circuiting the transformers secondary winding.
Operating a current transformer with the secondary winding open will
cause a high voltage that may damage the transformer and may
cause injuries to humans.

Do not remove the screw from a powered IED or from an IED


connected to power circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents
are present

Using the certified conductive bags to transport PCBs (modules).


Handling modules with a conductive wrist strap connected to
protective earth and on an antistatic surface. Electrostatic discharge
may cause damage to the module due to electronic circuits are
sensitive to this phenomenon

Do not connect live wires to the IED, internal circuitry may be


damaged

When replacing modules using a conductive wrist strap connected to


protective earth. Electrostatic discharge may damage the modules
and IED circuitry

When installing and commissioning, take care to avoid electrical


shock if accessing wiring and connection IEDs

Changing the setting value group will inevitably change the IEDs
operation. Be careful and check regulations before making the
change

Contents
Chapter 1

Introduction .................................................................................................................. 1

Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 2

Features ...................................................................................................................................... 3

Functions..................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1

Protection functions ..................................................................................................... 5

3.2

Control functions .......................................................................................................... 6

3.3

Monitoring functions ..................................................................................................... 6

3.4

Station communication ................................................................................................ 6

3.5

IED software tools ........................................................................................................ 7

Chapter 2
1

General IED application ............................................................................................... 9

Display on LCD screen ............................................................................................................. 10


1.1

LCD screen display function ...................................................................................... 10

1.2

Analog display function .............................................................................................. 10

1.3

Report display function .............................................................................................. 10

1.4

Menu dispaly function ................................................................................................ 10

Report record ............................................................................................................................ 11

Disturbance recorder ................................................................................................................ 12

3.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 12

3.2

Fault recording ........................................................................................................... 12

3.3

Wave recording .......................................................................................................... 12

3.4

Sequence of event record.......................................................................................... 13

3.5

Operation record ........................................................................................................ 13

Self-supervision function ........................................................................................................... 14


4.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 14

4.2

Self-supervision principle ........................................................................................... 14

4.3

Self-supervision report ............................................................................................... 14

Time synchroniation function .................................................................................................... 16


5.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 16

5.2

Synchronization principle ........................................................................................... 16

5.2.1

Synchronization from IRIG......................................................................................... 17

5.2.2

Synchronization via PPS or PPM .............................................................................. 17

5.2.3

Synchronization via SNTP ......................................................................................... 17

Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 18
6.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 18

6.2

Operation principle ..................................................................................................... 18

Authorization ............................................................................................................................. 19
7.1

Chapter 3
1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 19
Overcurrent protection ............................................................................................... 21

Overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................. 22


1.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 22

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................... 22

1.2.1

Time characteristics ........................................................................................... 22

1.2.2

Inrush restraint function ..................................................................................... 24

1.2.3

Low voltage component ..................................................................................... 24

1.2.4

Direction determination feature .......................................................................... 25

1.2.5

Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 26

1.3

Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 28

1.4

Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 29


1.4.1

Setting list........................................................................................................... 29

1.5

Reports ...................................................................................................................... 30

1.6

Technical data ........................................................................................................... 31


Approx. 0.95 at I/In 0.5 ................................................................................................... 31

Chapter 4
1

Earth fault protection ................................................................................................. 33

Earth fault protection ................................................................................................................. 34


1.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 34

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................... 35


1.2.1

Time characteristic ............................................................................................. 35

1.2.2

Inrush restraint ................................................................................................... 36

1.2.3

Direction determination feature .......................................................................... 37

1.2.4

Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 39

1.3

Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 41

1.4

Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 42


1.4.1

Setting list........................................................................................................... 42

1.5

IED reports................................................................................................................. 44

1.6

Technical data ........................................................................................................... 44


Approx. 0.95 at I/Ir 0.5 .................................................................................................... 44

Chapter 5
1

Sensitive earth fault protection .................................................................................. 47

Sensitive overcurrent protection ............................................................................................... 48


1.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 48

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................... 48


1.2.1

Time characteristic ............................................................................................. 48

1.2.2

Direction determination feature .......................................................................... 49

1.2.3

Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 52

1.3

Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 53

1.4

Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 54


1.4.1

1.5

IED reports................................................................................................................. 56

1.6

Technical data ........................................................................................................... 56

Chapter 6
1

Setting list........................................................................................................... 54

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection ............................................................... 59

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection ............................................................................... 60


1.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 60

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................... 60

1.3

1.2.1

Protection function description ........................................................................... 60

1.2.2

Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 61

Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 62

1.4

Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 62


1.4.1

1.5

IED reports ................................................................................................................. 64

1.6

Technical data ........................................................................................................... 64

Chapter 7
1

Thermal overload protection ...................................................................................... 67

Thermal overload protection ..................................................................................................... 68


1.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 68

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................... 68


1.2.1

Input and output signals............................................................................................. 70

1.4

Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 70


IED reports ................................................................................................................. 71

1.6

Technical data ........................................................................................................... 71


Current overload protection ....................................................................................... 73

Current overload protection ...................................................................................................... 74


1.1

Function description ................................................................................................... 74


1.1.1

Logic diagram ..................................................................................................... 74

1.2

Input and output signals............................................................................................. 74

1.3

Setting parameter ...................................................................................................... 75


1.3.1

1.4

Setting list ........................................................................................................... 75

IED reports ................................................................................................................. 75

Chapter 9

Overvoltage protection ............................................................................................... 77

Overvoltage protection .............................................................................................................. 78


1.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 78

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................... 78


1.2.1

Overvoltage protection principle ........................................................................ 78

1.2.2

Voltage connection ............................................................................................. 79

1.2.3

Logic diagram ..................................................................................................... 80

1.3

Input and output signals............................................................................................. 81

1.4

Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 81


1.4.1

Setting list ........................................................................................................... 81

1.5

IED reports ................................................................................................................. 82

1.6

Technical data ........................................................................................................... 83

Chapter 10
1

Setting list ........................................................................................................... 70

1.5
Chapter 8

Function description ........................................................................................... 68

1.3

1.4.1

Setting list ........................................................................................................... 63

Undervoltage protection............................................................................................. 85

Undervoltage protection ............................................................................................................ 86


1.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 86

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................... 86


1.2.1

Protection function description ........................................................................... 86

1.2.2

Voltage connection ............................................................................................. 87

1.2.3

Depending on the VT location ............................................................................ 88

1.2.4

Logic diagram ..................................................................................................... 89

1.3

Input and output signals............................................................................................. 91

1.4

Setting parameter ...................................................................................................... 92

1.4.1
1.5

IED reports................................................................................................................. 93

1.6

Technical data ........................................................................................................... 93

Chapter 11
1

Displacement voltage protection ............................................................................... 95

Displacement voltage protection............................................................................................... 96


1.1

Introduction ................................................................................................................ 96

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................... 96


1.2.1

Displacement voltage input ................................................................................ 96

1.2.2

Protection description ........................................................................................ 96

1.2.3

Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 97

1.3

Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 98

1.4

Setting parameter ...................................................................................................... 99


1.4.1

IED reports............................................................................................................... 100

1.6

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 100


Circuit breaker failure protection.............................................................................. 103

Circuit breaker failure protection ............................................................................................. 104


1.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 104

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................. 104


1.2.1

Protection description ...................................................................................... 104

1.2.2

Current criterion evaluation .............................................................................. 105

1.2.3

Circuit breaker auxiliary contact evaluation ..................................................... 105

1.2.4

Logic diagram................................................................................................... 106

1.3

Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 107

1.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 108


1.4.1

IED reports............................................................................................................... 108

1.6

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 109


Dead zone protection ............................................................................................... 111

Dead zone protection ...............................................................................................................112


1.1

Introduction ...............................................................................................................112

1.2

Protection principle ...................................................................................................112


1.2.1

Function description ..........................................................................................112

1.2.2

Logic diagram....................................................................................................114

1.3

Input and output signals ...........................................................................................114

1.4

Setting parameter .....................................................................................................115


1.4.1

Setting list..........................................................................................................115

1.5

IED reports................................................................................................................116

1.6

Technical data ..........................................................................................................116

Chapter 14
1

Setting list......................................................................................................... 108

1.5
Chapter 13
1

Setting list........................................................................................................... 99

1.5
Chapter 12
1

Setting list........................................................................................................... 92

Synchro-check and energizing check function .........................................................117

Synchro-check and energizing check function ........................................................................118


1.1

Introduction ...............................................................................................................118

1.2

Function principle .....................................................................................................118


1.2.1

Synchro-check mode ........................................................................................119

1.2.2

Energizing check mode .................................................................................... 120

1.2.3

Override mode ................................................................................................. 121

1.2.4

Logic diagram ................................................................................................... 121

1.3

Input and output signals........................................................................................... 122

1.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 123


1.4.1

1.5

IED reports ............................................................................................................... 124

1.6

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 125

Chapter 15
1

Autoreclosing function ............................................................................................. 127

Autoreclosing function ............................................................................................................. 128


1.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 128

1.2

Function principle ..................................................................................................... 128


1.2.1

Auto-reclosing initiation modules ..................................................................... 128

1.2.2

Autoreclosing logic ........................................................................................... 129

1.3

Input and output signals........................................................................................... 132

1.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 134


1.4.1

IED reports ............................................................................................................... 136

1.6

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 137


Unbalance protection ............................................................................................... 139

Unbalance protection .............................................................................................................. 140


1.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 140

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................. 140

1.3

Input and output signals........................................................................................... 146

1.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 147


1.4.1

1.5

Under current monitoring ......................................................................................... 149

Under current monitoring ........................................................................................................ 150


1.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 150

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................. 150


1.2.1

Function description ......................................................................................... 150

1.2.2

Logic diagram ................................................................................................... 150

1.3

Input and output signals........................................................................................... 151

1.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 151


1.4.1

1.5

Setting list ......................................................................................................... 151

IED reports ............................................................................................................... 152

Chapter 18
1

Setting list ......................................................................................................... 147

IED reports ............................................................................................................... 147

Chapter 17
1

Setting list ......................................................................................................... 134

1.5
Chapter 16
1

Setting list ......................................................................................................... 123

Load shedding protection ........................................................................................ 153

Low frequency load shedding protection ................................................................................ 154


1.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 154

1.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................. 154


1.2.1

Function description ......................................................................................... 154

1.3

Input and output signals........................................................................................... 155

1.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 156

1.4.1
1.5
2

IED reports............................................................................................................... 157

Low voltage load shedding protection .................................................................................... 158


2.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 158

2.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................. 158


2.2.1

Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 159

2.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 160


2.4.1

Overload load shedding protection ......................................................................................... 162


3.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 162

3.2

Protection principle .................................................................................................. 162


Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 163

3.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 164


Setting list......................................................................................................... 164

3.5

IED reports............................................................................................................... 164

3.6

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 165

Chapter 19

Fast busbar protection scheme ............................................................................... 167

Fast busbar protection scheme .............................................................................................. 168


1.1

Function description ................................................................................................ 168

1.2

Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 169

1.3

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 170


1.3.1

1.4

Setting list......................................................................................................... 170

IED reports............................................................................................................... 170

Chapter 20

Secondary system supervision ................................................................................ 171

Current circuit supervision ...................................................................................................... 172


1.1

Function principle .................................................................................................... 172


1.1.1

Function description ......................................................................................... 172

1.1.2

Logic diagram................................................................................................... 172

1.2

Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 172

1.3

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 173


1.3.1

1.4
2

Fucntion description ......................................................................................... 162

3.3

3.4.1

Setting list......................................................................................................... 160

IED reports............................................................................................................... 161

3.2.1

Funciton description ......................................................................................... 158

2.3

2.5
3

Setting list......................................................................................................... 156

Setting list......................................................................................................... 173

IED reports............................................................................................................... 173

Fuse failure supervision VT .................................................................................................... 174


2.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 174

2.2

Function principle .................................................................................................... 174


2.2.1

Three phases (symmetrical) VT Fail ................................................................ 174

2.2.2

Single/two phases (asymmetrical) VT Fail ....................................................... 175

2.2.3

The fourth voltage U4 VT fail ........................................................................... 175

2.2.4

Logic diagram................................................................................................... 175

2.3

Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 177

2.4

Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 177

2.4.1

Setting list ......................................................................................................... 177

2.5

IED reports ............................................................................................................... 178

2.6

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 178

Chapter 21

Monitoring function .................................................................................................. 181

Switching devices status monitoring ....................................................................................... 182

Self-supervision ...................................................................................................................... 182

Chapter 22
1

1.1

Protocol .................................................................................................................... 184


1.1.1

IEC61850-8 communication protocol ............................................................... 184

1.1.2

IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol........................................................ 184

1.2

Communication port ................................................................................................. 185


1.2.1

Front communication port ................................................................................ 185

1.2.2

RS485 communication ports ............................................................................ 185

1.2.3

Ethernet communication ports ......................................................................... 185

1.3

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 185

1.4

Typical substation communication scheme ............................................................. 188

1.5

Typical time synchronizing scheme ......................................................................... 188

Chapter 23
1

Station communication ............................................................................................ 183

Overview ................................................................................................................................. 184

Hardware ................................................................................................................. 189

Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 190


1.1

IED structure ............................................................................................................ 190

1.2

IED module arrangement......................................................................................... 190

Local human-machine interface .............................................................................................. 192


2.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 192

2.2

Liquid crystal display (LCD) ..................................................................................... 192

2.3

LED .......................................................................................................................... 193

2.4

Keyboard ................................................................................................................. 193

2.5

IED menu ................................................................................................................. 194


2.5.1

Menu construction ............................................................................................ 194

2.5.2

Operation status ............................................................................................... 196

2.5.3

Operation status ............................................................................................... 197

2.5.4

Operation configuration .................................................................................... 197

2.5.5

Settings ............................................................................................................ 197

2.5.6

Report............................................................................................................... 197

2.5.7

Communication configuration .......................................................................... 198

2.5.8

Testing .............................................................................................................. 198

2.5.9

Device setup .................................................................................................... 199

2.5.10

Device information ........................................................................................... 200

Analog input module ............................................................................................................... 201


3.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 201

3.2

Terminals of analog input module ........................................................................... 202

3.3

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 206

Fast binary Input & Output module ......................................................................................... 208


4.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 208

4.2

Terminals of fast binary input & output module ....................................................... 208

4.3

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 210

Fast binary output module ...................................................................................................... 212


5.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 212

5.2

Terminals of fast binary output module ................................................................... 212

Binary input & output module .................................................................................................. 214


6.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 214

6.2

Terminals of binary & output module ....................................................................... 214

CPU module............................................................................................................................ 217


7.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 217

7.2

Terminals of CPU module ....................................................................................... 217

7.3

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 219

Power supply module ............................................................................................................. 221


8.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................. 221

8.2

Terminals of power supply module .......................................................................... 221

8.3

Technical data ......................................................................................................... 223

Technical data ......................................................................................................................... 224


9.1

Type tests ................................................................................................................ 224

9.2

IED design ............................................................................................................... 227

9.3

CE certificate ........................................................................................................... 228

Chapter 24
1

Appendix .................................................................................................................. 229

General setting list .................................................................................................................. 230


1.1

Setting list for CSC-211 M01 ................................................................................... 230

1.2

Setting list for CSC-211 M02 ................................................................................... 237

1.3

Setting list for CSC-211 M03 ................................................................................... 244

1.4

Setting list for CSC-211 M05 ................................................................................... 250

1.5

Setting list for CSC-211 M6 ..................................................................................... 255

1.6

Setting list for CSC-211 V01.................................................................................... 259

1.7

Setting list for CSC-211 C01 ................................................................................... 262

1.8

Setting list for CSC-211 C02 ................................................................................... 268

General report list ................................................................................................................... 275


2.1

Event report list ........................................................................................................ 275

2.2

Alarm report list ....................................................................................................... 277

Typical connection .................................................................................................................. 282

Time inverse characteristic ..................................................................................................... 304

4.1

11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves ................................. 304

4.2

User defined characteristic ...................................................................................... 304

4.3

Typical inverse curves ............................................................................................. 305

CT Requirement...................................................................................................................... 317
5.1

Overview .................................................................................................................. 317

5.2

Current transformer classification ............................................................................ 318

5.3

Abbreviations (according to IEC 60044-1, -6, as defined) ...................................... 319

5.4

General current transformer requirements .............................................................. 320


5.4.1

Protective checking current.............................................................................. 320

5.5

5.4.2

CT class ........................................................................................................... 320

5.4.3

Accuracy class ................................................................................................. 322

5.4.4

Ratio of CT ....................................................................................................... 322

5.4.5

Rated secondary current .................................................................................. 323

5.4.6

Secondary burden ............................................................................................ 323

Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f requirements ..................................................... 323


5.5.1

Definite time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection ........................ 324

5.5.2

Inverse time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection ........................ 325

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction

About this chapter


This chapter gives an overview of SIFANG Multifunction
Protection IED CSC-211.

Chapter 1 Introduction

Overview
CSC-211 series are selective, reliable and high speed multifunction
protection IED (Intelligent Electronic Device), which are able to be applied
for protection, control and measurement for following applications:

Applicable in subtransmission network and distribution network with


solidly earthed (grounded), low-resistance earthed, isolated or
compensated neutral point

Protection of feeders, capacitors, distribution transformers, bus


coupler, etc.

Used as backup protection IED for lines, transformers, reactors and


busbar

Providing control and monitoring functions of the circuit breakers,


disconnector, etc.

Supporting all functionalities required for automation system

Chapter 1 Introduction

Features

Extensive multifunction IED including protection, control and


monitoring functions

Three pole tripping required in sub-transmission and distribution


network

A complete protection functions library, include:

Overcurrent protection (50, 51, 67)

Earth fault protection (50N, 51N, 67N)

Neutral earth fault protection (50G, 51G)

Sensitive earth fault protection (50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection (46)

Thermal overload protection (49)

Overload protection (50OL)

Overvoltage protection (59)

Undervoltage protection (27)

Displacement voltage protection (64)

Circuit breaker failure protection (50BF)

Dead zone protection (50SH-Z)

Synchro-check and energizing check (25)

Auto-recloser function for three-phase reclosing (79)

Unbalanced current or voltage protection

Undercurrent protection (37)

load shedding function


3

Chapter 1 Introduction

Voltage transformer secondary circuit supervision (97FF)

Current transformer secondary circuit supervision

Fast overcurrent/busbar protection scheme using IEC61850


GOOSE-message

CB status supervision

Self-supervision to all modules in the IED

Complete and massive reports recording, trip reports, alarm reports,


startup reports and operation reports. Any kinds of reports can be
stored no less than 40 items, and be memorized in case of power
disconnection

Up to two electric /optical Ethernet ports can be selected to


communicate with substation automation system by IEC61850 or
IEC60870-5-103 protocols

One electric RS-485 port is able to communicate with substation


automation system by IEC60870-5-103 protocol

Time synchronization via network(SNTP), pulse and IRIG-B mode

Versatile human-machine interface

Multifunctional software tool CSmart for setting, monitoring, fault


recording analysis, configuration, etc.

Chapter 1 Introduction

Functions

3.1

Protection functions

Description

ANSI Code

IEC 61850

IEC 60617

Logical Node

graphical

Name

symbol

Current protection
3IINV>
Overcurrent protection

50,51,67

PTOC

3I >>
3I >>>
I0INV>

Earth fault protection

50N, 51N, 67N

PEFM

I0>>
I0>>>

Neutral earth fault protection

50G, 51G

Sensitive earth fault protection


Negative-sequence overcurrent

50Ns, 51Ns,

3INE>

67Ns

3INE>>

46

protection
Thermal overload protection

49

PTTR

Ith

Overload protection

50OL

PTOC

3I >OL

Voltage protection
Overvoltage protection

59

PTOV

Undervoltage protection

27

PTUV

Displacement voltage protection

64

3U>
3U>>
3U<
3U<<
VE>

Breaker protection and control function


3I> BF
Breaker failure protection

50BF

RBRF

I0>BF
I2>BF

Dead zone protection

50SH-Z

Synchro-check and energizing check

25

RSYN

Auto-reclosing

79

RREC

Three-pole tripping

94-3

PTRC

OI

Capacitor bank protection


Unbalanced current protection

46NI

Chapter 1 Introduction

Unbalanced voltage protection

46NU

Undercurrent protection

37

I<

Load shedding function


Low frequency load shedding function

81U

Low voltage load shedding function

27

Overload load shedding function


Secondary system supervision
CT secondary circuit supervision
VT secondary circuit supervision

97FF
Other functions

Fast busbar protection using reverse


interlocking

3.2

Control functions

Description

ANSI Code

IEC 61850

IEC 60617

Logical Node

graphical

Name

symbol

Circuit breaker, disconnector and


other switching devices control

3.3

Monitoring functions
Description

Position of circuit breaker, disconnector and other switching device monitoring


Circuit breaker status supervision
Auxiliary contacts of circuit breaker supervision
Self-supervision
Fault recorder

3.4

Station communication
Description

Chapter 1 Introduction

Front communication port


Isolated RS232 port
Rear communication port
0-1 isolated electrical RS485 communication ports
0-2 Ethernet electrical/optical communication ports
Time synchronization port
Communication protocols
IEC 61850 protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

3.5

IED software tools


Functions

Reading measuring value


Reading IED report
Setting
IED testing
Disturbance recording analysis
IED configuration
Printing

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 2 General IED application

Chapter 2 General IED application

About this chapter


This chapter describes the use of the included software
functions in the IED. The chapter discusses general application
possibilities.

Chapter 2 General IED application

Display on LCD screen

1.1

LCD screen display function


The LCD screen displays measured analog quantities, report ouputs, menu
and logic linker status.

1.2

Analog display function


The analog display includes measured Ia, Ib, Ic, 3I0, Is0, Ua, Ub, Uc, U4, Mea
Ia, Mea Ib, Mea Ic, Mea Ua, Mea Ub, Mea Uc, Mea Uab, Mea Ubc and Mea
Uca.
The Mea means that the measurement analogue quantity, for example, Mea
Ia, means the measurement current for phase A.

1.3

Report display function


The report display includes tripping, alarm and operation recording.

1.4

Menu dispaly function


The menu dispaly includes main menu and debugging menu, see chapter
Chapter 23 for detail.

10

Chapter 2 General IED application

Report record
The report record includes tripping, alarm and operation reports. See Chapter
24 general report list for detail.

11

Chapter 2 General IED application

Disturbance recorder

3.1

Introduction
To get fast, complete and reliable information about fault current, voltage,
binary signal and other disturbances in the power system is very important.
This is accomplished by the disturbance recorder function and facilitates a
better understanding of the behavior of the power system and related primary
and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the
recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to explain a
disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan, improvement of existing
equipment etc.
The disturbance recorder, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
from measured analogue quantities, calculated analogue quantity, binary
input and output signals.

3.2

Fault recording
The IED can save the latest 40 fault records (be memorized in case of power
disconnection), which can be read via the IED operation interface or
communication port. The fault record consists of the following information:

3.3

Fault time: date and time

Event list: operative element and time

Running data: current, voltage, frequency and phase angle

Operation setting

IED operation mode

Wave recording
Wave recording function is used to record the analogue data and status with a
pre-defined length after and before disturbance occurs, reshow the operation
track of the protected IED. The recording wave includes at most 12 analogue
channels, 64 binary channels (32 binary input, 16 binary output and 16
GOOSE signal) and time sequence information. IED records the data as the
sample of 20 points in each cycle, accumulated length of each record is up to

12

Chapter 2 General IED application

8 seconds and 20 latest recording waves can be stored. Wave are searched
and called via dedicated software from the RS232 serial port on panel, and be
converted to COMTRADE format for being used by other recording wave
analysis software or fault simulation software.

3.4

Sequence of event record


The IED monitors and records the change of operation event, alarm event,
binary input, binary output and protection linker, records the event occurrence
time, reason and current status, and transfers the information to the station
control center via the communication port.

3.5

Operation record
The disturbance recorder information is saved for each of the recorded
disturbances in the IED and the user may use the local human machine
interface or dedicated tool to get some general information about the
recordings. The disturbance recording information is included in the
disturbance recorder files. The information is also available on a station bus
according to IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103.
Fault wave recorder with great capacity, can record full process of any fault,
and can save the corresponding records. Optional data format or wave format
is provided, and can be exported through serial port or Ethernet port by
COMTRADE format.

13

Chapter 2 General IED application

Self-supervision function

4.1

Introduction
The IED may test all hardware components itself, including loop out of the
relay coil. Finding whether or not the IED is in fault through warning LED and
warning characters which shown in LCD and display reports to indicate fault
type.
The method of fault elimination is replacing fault board or eliminating external
fault.

4.2

4.3

Self-supervision principle

Measuring resistance between analog circuits and ground

Measuring the output voltage in every class

Checking zero drift and scale

Verifying alarm circuit

Verifying binary input

Checking actual live tripping including circuit breaker

Check setting values and parameters

Self-supervision report
Table 1 Self-supervision report list

14

Information

Description

RAM Error

RAM is abnormal

EPROM Error

EPROM is abnormal

Flash Error

Flash is abnormal

BO Abnormal

Binary output is abnormal

AD Error

AD is abnormal

Zero Offset

Zero drift is out of limitation

Invalid SetGr

Pointer of setting group is error

Chapter 2 General IED application

Information

Description

Setting Chk ERR

Setting value is error

Logic Scheme ERR

Logic file and CPU file do not cooperate

15

Chapter 2 General IED application

Time synchroniation function

5.1

Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of
absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes
comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system
possible.

5.2

Synchronization principle
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and
the time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is
normally called the clock accuracy and means how much the error increases,
i.e. how much the clock gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that
knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical
structure. A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides
synchronization to lower levels.

A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives


synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the
accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A module can have
16

Chapter 2 General IED application

several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors,


which gives the module the possibility to choose the source with the best
quality, and to adjust its internal clock from this source. The maximum error of
a clock can be defined as a function of:

5.2.1

The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message

The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.

Synchronization from IRIG


The built in GPS clock module receives and decodes time information from
the global positioning system. The module is located on the CPU Module. The
GPS interfaces to the IED supply two possible synchronization methods,
IRIGB and PPS (or PPM).

5.2.2

Synchronization via PPS or PPM


The IED accepts PPS or PPM to the GPS interfaces on the CPU Module.
These pulses can be generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station
master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a
relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edges on the
signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine signal.

5.2.3

Synchronization via SNTP


SNTP provides a Ping-Pong method of synchronization. A message is sent
from an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message
after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the
normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850
network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be a SNTP-server present,
preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an
accuracy that will give 1ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be
set as a SNTP-time server.

17

Chapter 2 General IED application

Setting

6.1

Introduction
Settings are divided into separate lists according to different functions. The
setting consists of two parts -setting list and communication parameters.

6.2

Operation principle
The setting procedure can be ended at any the time by the key SET or
QUIT. If the key SET is pressed, the display shows the content of Select.
The range of setting zone is from 1 to 16. After confirming with the setting
zone-key SET, those new settings will be valid. If key QUIT is pressed
instead, all modifications which have been changed will be ignored.

18

Chapter 2 General IED application

Authorization

7.1

Introduction
To safeguard the interests of customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, subject of authorization handling. The
concept of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED and the associated
tools is based on the following facts:

There are two types of points of access to the IED:

local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports

There are different levels (or types) of guest, super user and protection
engineer that can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools
functionality.

19

Chapter 2 General IED application

20

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

About this chapter


This chapter describes the protection principle, input and
output signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and
technical data used for overcurrent protection.

21

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Overcurrent protection

1.1

Introduction
The non-directional overcurrent elements can be applied as backup
protection functions in various applications including line and transformer
protection in systems with radial nature and those which are supplied from
a single source. The directional overcurrent protection allows the
application of the IED also in systems where protection coordination
depends on both the magnitude of the fault current and the direction of
power flow to the fault location, for instance in case of parallel lines or
transformers, or in a loop configuration. Main features of the overcurrent
protection are as follows:

Two definite time stages

One inverse time stage

11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves as well as


optional user defined characteristic

Settable directional element characteristic angle to satisfy the different


network conditions and applications

Each stage can be set individually as directional/non-directional

Each stage can be set individually for inrush restraint

Cross blocking function for inrush detection

Settable maximum inrush current

First definite stage and inverse time stage can be set individually to
alarm or trip

VT secondary circuit supervision for directional protection. Once VT


failure happens, the directional stage can be set to be blocked or to be
non-directional

Undervoltage criteria checking (selectable), blocking of the definite


time stages is possible when the measured voltage exceeds the
threshold

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Time characteristics

22

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

The time characteristic for each stage can be chosen as definite time stage
or some type of inverse time characteristic. 11 kinds of inverse time
characteristics are available. It is also possible to create a user defined
time characteristic. Each stage can operate in conjunction with the
integrated inrush restraint and directional functions and operate based on
measured phase current. In addition, an undervoltage control feature is
provided which can be used for definite overcurrent stages.
Furthermore, each stage is independent from each other and can be
combined as desired.
Pickup value for the definite stage can be set in setting value. Each phase
current is compared with the corresponding setting value with delay time. If
currents exceed the associated pickup value, after expiry of the time delay,
the trip command or alarm signal is issued. The dropout value of the
definite stages is approximately equal to 96% of the pickup value for I/In
0.5. The condition for delay time starting is expressed in the following
formula:

Equation 1

The delay time can be set for each definite stage individually in setting.
After the delay time elapsed, a trip command or alarm signal is issued.
For the delay time of inverse time characteristic, which is calculated here
based on the type of the set characteristic, the magnitude of the current
and a time multiplier, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are
available, and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using
following formula:

K_OC

Equation 2
where:
A_OC: Time factor for inverse time stage
B_OC: Delay time for inverse time stage
P_OC: Index for inverse time stage

23

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

K_OC: Time multiplier

By applying setting of these coefficients, the IED calculates the tripping or


alarming time from the measured current in each phase separately. Once
the calculated time has been elapsed, the trip signal or alarm signal is
issued.

1.2.2

Inrush restraint function


The protection IED may detect large magnetizing inrush currents during
transformer energizing. In addition to considerable unbalance fundamental
current, inrush current comprises large second harmonic current which
does not appear in short circuit current. Therefore, the inrush current may
affect the protection functions which operate based on the fundamental
component of the measured current. Accordingly, inrush restraint logic is
provided to prevent overcurrent protection from maloperation.
The inrush restraint feature operates based on evaluation of the 2nd
harmonic content which is present in measured current. The inrush
condition is recognized when the ratio of second harmonic current to
fundamental component exceeds the corresponding setting value for each
phase. The setting value is applicable for both definite time stage and
inverse time stage. The inrush restraint feature will be performed as soon
as the ration exceeds the set threshold.
Furthermore, by recognition of the inrush current in one phase, it is
possible to set the protection in a way that not only the phase with the
considerable inrush current, but also the other phases of the overcurrent
protection are blocked for a certain time. This is achieved by
cross-blocking feature integrated in the IED.
The inrush restraint function has a maximum inrush current setting. Once
the measuring current exceeds the setting, the overcurrent protection will
not be blocked any longer.

1.2.3

Low voltage component


It is possible to set the protection in a way that the definite stages of
overcurrent element would operate only when at least one phase-to-phase
voltage falls below than the corresponding low voltage setting. This
component can be used to prevent any maloperation of the overcurrent
element during reverse charging of electric motors. The low voltage

24

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

component can be set for each definite stage by the dedicated binary
settings.
The voltages connected to IED may correspond to three phase to earth
voltages VA-N, VB-N, VC-N or any phase to earth voltage or phase to
phase voltage by using dedicated binary setting. In case of 3Ph V
Connect is enabled, three phase to phase voltages are measured, or any
one phase to phase voltage should be measured.

1.2.4

Direction determination feature


The direction detection is performed by determining the position of current
vector in directional characteristic. In other word, it is done by comparing
phase angle between the fault current and the reference voltage. Figure 1
illustrates the direction detection characteristic for phase A element.
90

Forward

IA
Bisector
Ph_Char

U BC_Ref

-IA

Figure 1 Direction detection characteristic of overcurrent protection directional element


where:
Ph_Char: The settable characteristic angle

The assignment of the applied measuring values used in direction


determination has been shown in Table 2 for different types of faults.
Table 2 Assignment of applied current and reference voltage for directional element

Phase

Current

Voltage

Ia

U bc

Ib

U ca
25

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Ic

U ab

As can be seen from Table 2, the healthy voltages are used in direction
determination. This guarantee corrects direction determination even if the
fault voltage has collapsed totally because of a single-phase short-circuit
fault. For three-phase short-circuit fault, without any healthy phase,
memory voltage values are used to determine direction clearly if the
measured voltage values are not sufficient. The detected direction is
based on the memory voltage of previous power cycles.
During direction detection, if VT fail happens (a short circuit or broken wire
in the voltage transformer's secondary circuit or operation of the voltage
transformer fuse), may result in maloperation by directional overcurrent
elements. In such situation, directional (if selected) overcurrent protection
will be blocked.

1.2.5

Logic diagram

Ia2/Ia1 >
OR

Ib2/Ib1 >

AND

Ic2/Ic1 >

Cross BLK

t<

Figure 2 Logic diagram of cross-blocking for inrush restraint

Uab<
Ubc<
Uca<

OC1_V Blk On

LV For OC 1
OR

OC2_V Blk On

LV For OC 2

Figure 3 Logic diagram of low voltage component feature

26

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Ia >
VT Fail
AND

Blk Fun_VTFail

OR

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

OR

OC1 Dir Off

Phase A Forward

OC1 Dir On

AND

DEF A OK

AND

LV For OC I

OC1_V Blk On

OC1 Dir Off

AND

OC1 V_Blk Off

OC1 V_Blk Off

0
OC1 2H_Blk Off

< I_2H_UnBlk
AND
Ia2/Ia1>

OC1 2H_Blk On

DEF A OK

Func_OC1

AND

Trip/Alarm

0
OC1 2H_Blk Off

Cross BLK
OC1 2H_Blk On

Figure 4 Logic diagram of definite overcurrent stage

27

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Ia Inverse

VT Fail
AND

Blk Fun_VTFail

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

OR

OR

AND

OC Inv Dir Off

Phase A Forward

OC Inv Dir On

OC Inv Dir Off

0
OCInv 2H_Blk Off

< I_2H_UnBlk
AND
Ia2/Ia1>

OCInv 2H_Blk On

INV A OK

Func_OC Inv

AND
0
OCInv 2H_Blk Off

Cross BLK
OCInv 2H_Blk On

Figure 5 Logic diagram of inverse overcurrent stage

1.3

Input and output signals


IP1
IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3

OC1_Trip
OC2_Trip
OC Inv Trip

Table 3 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

Signal for current input 1

IP2

Signal for current input 2

IP3

Signal for current input 3

UP1

Signal for voltage input 1

UP2

Signal for voltage input 2

UP3

Signal for voltage input 3

28

Trip/Alarm

INV A OK

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Table 4 Binary output list


Signal

Description

OC1_Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 1 trip

OC2_Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 2 trip

OC Inv Trip

Overcurrent protection inverse time stage trip

1.4

Setting parameters

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 5 Function setting list for overcurrent protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

In

I_OC1

2.

0.4

3.
4.

Explanation

Unit

Min.

Max.

Current setting for stage 1

0.05In

20.00In

T_OC1

Time setting for stage 1

0.00

60.00

1.5In

I_OC2

Current setting for stage 2

0.05In

20.00In

0.1

T_OC2

Time setting for stage 2

0.00

60.00

1.00

120.0

12

0.05In

20.00In

0.05

999.0

0.001

1000

0.01

10.00

0.00

60.00

degree

0.00

90.00

0.25In

20.00In

0.07

0.50

0.00

60.00

Low voltage setting for


5.

90.0

U_OC_UnBlk

blocking overcurrent
protection (phase to phase)

6.

Curve_OC Inv

7.

0.5In

I_OC Inv

8.

K_OC Inv

9.

0.056

A_OC Inv

10.

0.02

P_OC Inv

11.

B_OC Inv

12.

30

Angle_OC

13.

In

I_2H_UnBlk

Inverse time curve


Current setting for inverse
time stage

Time multiplier
Time factor for inverse time
stage

Index for inverse time stage


Delay time for inverse time
stage
Direction characteristic angle
Maximum inrush current
setting
Ratio for second harmonic

14.

0.15

Ratio_I2/I1

current to fundamental
component

15.

0.2

T2h_Cross_Blk

Time setting for


cross-blocking function

Table 6 Logical linker list for overcurrent protection

29

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

NO.

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

Func_OC1

Enable or disable the stage 1 of overcurrent protection

2.

Func_OC2

Enable or disable the stage 2 of overcurrent protection

3.

Func_OC Inv

Enable or disable the inverse time stage of overcurrent


protection

Table 7 Binary setting list for overcurrent protection


0

1.0

OC1 Dir Off

OC1 Dir On

1.1

OC1 V_Blk Off

OC1_V Blk On

1.2

OC1 2H_Blk Off

OC1 2H_Blk On

1.3

OC2 Dir Off

OC2 Dir On

1.4

OC2 V_Blk Off

OC2 V_Blk On

1.5

OC2 2H_Blk Off

C2 2H_Blk On

1.6

OC Inv Dir Off

OC Inv Dir On

1.7

OCInv 2H_Blk Off

OCInv 2H_Blk On

2.9

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

2.14

UnBlk Fun_VT Fail

Blk Fun_VT Fail

4.0

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

4.1

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

1.5

Reports

Bit

Explanation
Enable or disable the direction for
stage 1
Enable or disable the low voltage
blocking for stage 1
Enable or disable the inrush
restraint for stage 1
Enable or disable the direction for
stage 2
Enable or disable the low voltage
blocking for stage 2
Enable or disable the inrush
restraint for stage 2
Enable or disable the direction for
inverse stage
Enable or disable the inrush
restraint for inverse stage
Select voltage connection way by
single phase or three phase
Enable the function of VT fail
blocking
Stage 1 of overcurrent protection
alarm or trip
Inverse stage of overcurrent
protection alarm or trip

Table 8 Event information list


Information

30

Description

OC1 Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues trip command

OC2 Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 2 issues trip command

OC Inv Trip

Overcurrent protection inverse time stage issues trip command

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Information

Description

Inrush Blk

Inrush is detected to block function.


Table 9 Alarm information list

Information

Description

OC1 Alarm

Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues alarm signal

OC Inv Alarm

Overcurrent protection inverse time stage issues alarm signal

1.6

Technical data
Table 10 Technical data for overcurrent protection

Item

Rang or Value

Tolerance

Definite time characteristics


Current

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3% setting or 0.02Ir

Time delay

0.00 to 60.00s, step 0.01s

1% setting or +40ms, at 200%


operating setting

Reset time

approx. 40ms

Reset ratio

Approx. 0.95 at I/In 0.5


Inverse time characteristics

Current

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3% setting or 0.02Ir

IEC standard

Normal inverse;

5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Very inverse;

<I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance

Extremely inverse;

with IEC60255-151

Long inverse
ANSI

Inverse;

5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Short inverse;

<I/ISETTING < 20, in

Long inverse;

accordance with ANSI/IEEE

Moderately inverse;

C37.112,

Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
user-defined characteristic

T=

5% setting + 40ms, at 2
<I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance
with IEC60255-151

Time factor of inverse time, A

0.005 to 200.0s, step 0.001s

Delay of inverse time, B

0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s

Index of inverse time, P

0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005

set time Multiplier for step n: k

0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01

Minimum operating time

20ms

31

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Maximum operating time

100s

Reset mode

instantaneous

Reset time

approx. 40ms,
Directional element

Operating area range

170

Characteristic angle

0to 90, step 1

32

3, at phase to phase
voltage >1V

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

About this chapter


This chapter presents the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
included in earth fault protection.

33

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Earth fault protection

1.1

Introduction
The non-directional earth fault elements can be applied as backup protection
functions in various applications including line and transformer protection in
systems with radial nature and those which are supplied from a single source.
The directional earth fault protection allows the application of the IED also in
systems where protection coordination depends on both the magnitude of the
earth fault current and the direction of power flow to the fault location, for
instance, in case of parallel lines or transformers, or in a loop configuration.
Main features of the earth fault are as follows:

34

Two definite time stages

One inverse time stage

11 kinds of the IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves as well
as optional user defined characteristic

Zero sequence directional element

Negative sequence directional element is applied as a complement to


zero sequence directional element. It can be enabled/disabled by setting

Each stage can be set individually as directional/non-directional

Settable directional element characteristic angle to satisfy the different


network conditions and applications

Each stage can be set individually for inrush restraint

Settable maximum inrush current

Inrush restraint function adopting 2nd harmonic measured phase or earth


current (settable)

First definite stage and inverse time stage can be set individually to alarm
or trip

VT secondary circuit supervision for directional protection function. Once


VT failure happens, the directional stage can be set to be blocked or to
be non-directional

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Zero-sequence current is calculated by summation of 3 phase currents or


measured from earth phase CT selectable

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Time characteristic
The time characteristic for each stage can be chosen as definite time stage or
some type of inverse time characteristic. 11 kinds of inverse time
characteristics are available. It is also possible to create a user defined time
characteristic. Each stage can operate in conjunction with the integrated
inrush restraint and directional functions and operate based on measured
phase current.
The earth fault protection can operate with the measured or calculated zero
sequence current (zero-sequence current IN measured from earth phase CT
or zero-sequence current 3I0 calculated by the summation of three phase
currents, 3I0=IA+IB+IC). These two types of measured quantity can be enabled
or disabled via binary setting. If setting 3I0 Measured is enabled in the
binary setting, the function will operate based on the measured
zero-sequence current, whereas, the 3I0 Calculated is enabled, the
zero-sequence current is calculated from the summation of three phase
currents.
Furthermore, each stage is independent from each other and can be
combined as desired.
Pickup value for the definite stage can be set in setting value. The measured
or calculated zero-sequence current is compared with the corresponding
setting value with delay time. If zero-sequence current exceed the associated
pickup value, after expiry of the time delay, trip command is issued. The
condition for delay time start is expressed in the following formula

Equation 3

The time delay can be set for each definite stage individually in setting. After
the delay time elapsed, trip command or alarm signal is issued. The drop out
value of the definite stages is approximately equal to 96% of the pickup value
for 3I0/In0.5.
35

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

The time delay of inverse time characteristic is calculated based on the type
of the set characteristic, the magnitude of the current and a time multiplier.
For the inverse time characteristic, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves
are available, and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using the
following equation:

K_EF

Equation 4
where:
A_EF: Time factor for inverse time stage
B_EF: Delay time for inverse time stage
P_EF: index for inverse time stage
K_EF: Time multiplier

The time is set to count up for a user-defined time delay. The time delay can
be set for each definite stage individually through corresponding settings.
After the user-defined time delays elapsed, a trip command is issued.

1.2.2

Inrush restraint
The protection IED may detect large magnetizing inrush currents during
transformer energizing. In addition to considerable unbalance fundamental
current, inrush current comprises large second harmonic current which does
not appear in short circuit current. Therefore, the inrush current may affect the
protection functions which operate based on the fundamental component of
the measured current. Accordingly, inrush restraint logic is provided to
prevent earth fault protection from maloperation.
Generally, inrush restraint for earth fault protection is performed based on the
second harmonic contents of three phase currents. However, it is possible to
use the IED only for earth fault protection and therefore, the phase currents
may be not connected to the IED. In such cases, if the binary setting of EF
Chk I02/I01 is enabled, second harmonic content of zero sequence current is
considered if the zero sequence current is measured from neutral CT. As
mentioned previously, the binary setting of 3I0 Measured is enabled for this
situation. So, the inrush condition is recognized if the ratio of second

36

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

harmonic content of measured zero sequence current to its fundamental


component exceeds corresponding setting value.
Furthermore, if the fundamental component of zero sequence current
exceeds the upper limit value for unblocking, the earth fault protection will not
be blocked any longer.
On the contrary, if binary setting of EF Chk I2/I1 is set, the inrush condition is
recognized if the ratio of second harmonic content in each phase current to
their fundamental component exceeds setting value.
Furthermore, if the fundamental component of each phase current exceeds
the upper limit value for unblocking, the earth fault protection will not be
blocked any longer.

1.2.3

Direction determination feature

1.2.3.1

Zero-sequence directional element


In this method, the direction determination is performed by comparing the
zero sequence system quantities. In current path, the measured IN current is
valid, when the neutral current is connected to the IED and the binary setting
3I0 Measured is enabled. Otherwise, the IED calculates quantity 3I0 from
the summation of the three phase currents when the binary setting 3I0
Calculated is enabled. In the voltage path, the displacement voltage VN is
used as reference voltage, if it is connected, and the binary setting 3U0
Measured is enabled. Otherwise, the IED calculates the zero sequence
voltage 3V0 from the summation of three phase voltages if binary setting 3U0
Calculated is enabled. Direction determination can be performed by the IED
for 3V0 quantity having a magnitude fall to 2V. Contrary to the directional
phase elements, which work based on the un-faulted voltage as reference
voltage, for the earth fault protection direction element, the zero sequence
voltage is used as the reference voltage. Depending on the connection of the
voltage transformer (setting 3U0 Measured/3U0 Calculated), VN or 3V0
(3V0=VA+VB+VC) is applied.
In order to satisfy different network conditions and applications, the reference
voltage can be rotated by adjustable angle between 0and 90in clockwise
direction (negative sign). It should be noted that the settings are applied for all
the directional stages of earth fault element. In this way, the vector of rotated
reference voltage can be closely adjusted to the vector of fault current -3I0
which lags the fault voltage 3V0 by the fault angle 0_Char. This will provide
the best detection result for the direction determination. The rotated reference
37

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

voltage defines the forward and reverse area. The forward area is in range of
80around the rotated reference voltage. If the vector of the fault current -3I0
is in this area, the fault condition is detected as forward direction. The
zero-sequence direction detection characteristic is shown in Figure 6.

3I 0

90

0
3U 0_Ref
0_Char

Forward

-3 I 0

Bisector

Figure 6 Direction detection characteristic of zero sequence directional element


where:
0_Char: The settable characteristic angle

1.2.3.2

Negative-sequence directional element


In this method, direction determination is performed by comparing the
negative sequence system quantities. To do so, the calculated negative
sequence current 3I2 is compared with the calculated negative sequence
voltage 3V2. This method is particularly suitable for the condition that the zero
sequence voltage is too low, for example, when a considerable zero
sequence mutual coupling exists between parallel lines or when there is an
unfavorable zero sequence impedance. In such cases it may be desirable to
determine direction of fault current by using negative sequence components.
If the binary setting for negative-sequence direction detection is enabled, the
default direction determination is performed by using the zero sequence
components, however, when the magnitude of zero sequence voltage falls
below permissible threshold of 2V, the negative-sequence directional element
is used to detect direction. On the contrary, if the negative-sequence direction
detection is disabled, the direction of earth fault current is only determined by
the zero sequence components. In this regard, if the magnitude of zero
sequence voltage magnitude is larger than 2V, proper direction determination

38

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

can be detected. However, for the condition that the zero sequence voltages
below 2V, no direction determination would be applied, thus, the fault is
considered as reverse direction.
The fault current -3I2 is in phase opposition to the fault current 3I2 and lags
from the voltage 3V2 by the fault angle 2_Char. To satisfy different
applications, the reference voltage can be rotated by adjustable angle
between 0and 90in clockwise direction (negative sign) to be closely
adjusted to the vector of fault current -3I2. This would provide the best
detection result for direction determination. The rotated reference voltage
defines the forward and reverse area. The forward area is in range of 80
around the rotated reference voltage. If the vector of fault current -3I2 is in this
area, the fault condition is detected as forward direction. The negative
sequence direction detection characteristic is shown in Figure 7.

3I2

90

0
3 U 2_ Ref
2_Char

Forward

-3 I 2

Bisector

Figure 7 Direction detection characteristic of negative sequence directional element


where:
2_Char: The settable characteristic angle

1.2.4

Logic diagram

I01 > 3I0_2H_UnBlk


1

EF Chk I02/I01

AND

Ir BLK EF

I02/I01 >

39

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Figure 8 Logic diagram for inrush restraint based on measured zero sequence current

Max(Ia1,Ib1,Ic1) >I_2H_UnBlk

AND

EF Chk I2/I1

Ir BLK EF

Ia2/Ia1 >
Ib2/Ib1 >

OR

Ic2/Ic1 >

Figure 9 Logic diagram for inrush restraint based on based on phase currents

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

VT Fail

OR

Blk Fun_VTFail

AND
U0/I0-
OR

3U0>2V

Forward
3U0 Calculated

VT Fail
U2/I2-

Blk Fun_VTFail

AND

EF U2/I2 Dir
OR
AND
UnBlk Fun_VTFail

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

V1p VT Fail

OR

Blk Fun_VTFail

AND
U0/I0-
OR

3U0>2V

Forward
3U0 Meaured

VT Fail
U2/I2-

Blk Fun_VTFail

AND

EF U2/I2 Dir
OR
AND
UnBlk Fun_VTFail

40

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Figure 10 Logic diagram for direction determination


I0 >
0
Ir BLK EF

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

1
Forward

Func_EF1

AND

EF1 Dir Off

Trip/Alarm

EF1 Dir On

Figure 11 Logic diagram for first definite stage of earth fault protection
I0 Inverse
0

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

Ir BLK EF

EFInv 2H_Blk On

1
Forward

Func_EF Inv

AND

EF Inv Dir Off

Trip/Alarm

EF Inv Dir On

Figure 12 Logic diagram for inverse time stage of earth fault protection

1.3

Input and output signals

IP1
IP2
IP3
IP0
UP1
UP2
UP3

EF1 Trip
EF2 Trip
EF Inv Trip

Table 11 Analog input list

41

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Signal

Description

IP1

Signal for current input 1

IP2

Signal for current input 2

IP3

Signal for current input 3

IP0

Signal for current input 0

UP1

Signal for voltage input 1

UP2

Signal for voltage input 2

UP3

Signal for voltage input 3


Table 12 Binary output list

Signal

Description

EF1 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 1 trip

EF2 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 2 trip

EF Inv Trip

Earth fault protection inverse time stage trip

1.4

Setting parameters

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 13 Function setting list for earth fault protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

In

3I0_EF1

2.

0.4

T_EF1

3.

1.5In

3I0_EF2

4.

0.1

T_EF2

5.

Curve_EF Inv

Explanation
Zero-sequence current
setting for stage 1
Time delay for stage 1
Zero-sequence current
setting for stage 2
Delay time for stage 2

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.05In

20.00In

0.00

60.00

0.05In

20.00In

0.00

60.00

12

0.05In

20.00In

0.05

999.0

0.001

1000

0.01

10.00

0.000

60.00

degree

0.00

90.00

Inverse time curve


Zero-sequence current

6.

0.5In

3I0_EF Inv

setting for inverse time

stage

42

7.

K_EF Inv

8.

12

A_EF Inv

9.

P_EF Inv

10.

B_EF Inv

11.

30

Angle_EF

Time multiplier
Time factor for inverse
time stage

Index for inverse time


stage
Delay time for inverse
time stage
Characteristic angle for

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

Unit

Min.

Max.

degree

0.00

90.00

0.25In

20.00In

0.25In

20.00In

0.07

0.50

0.07

0.50

zero-sequence direction
Characteristic angle for
12.

30

Angle_Neg

negative-sequence
direction

13.

In

I_2H_UnBlk

14.

In

3I0_2H_UnBlk

Maximum inrush phase


current setting
Maximum inrush zero
sequence current
setting
Ratio for second

15.

0.15

Ratio I2/I1

harmonic current to
fundamental component
Ratio for zero sequence
second harmonic

16.

0.15

Ratio I02/I01

current to zero
sequence fundamental
component

Table 14 Logical linker list for earth fault protection


NO.

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

Func_EF1

Enable or disable the stage 1 of earth fault protection

2.

Func_EF2

Enable or disable the stage 2 of earth fault protection

3.

Func_EF Inv

Enable or disable the inverse time stage of earth fault protection

Table 15 Binary setting list for earth fault protection


Bit

Default

1.8

EF1 Dir Off

EF1 Dir On

1.9

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

1.10

EF2 Dir Off

EF2 Dir On

1.11

EF2 2H_Blk Off

EF2 2H_Blk On

1.12

EF Inv Dir Off

EF Inv Dir On

1.13

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

EFInv 2H_Blk On

1.14

EF Chk I2/I1

EF Chk I02/I01

Explanation
Enable or disable the
direction for stage 1
Enable or disable the inrush
restraint for stage 1
Enable or disable the
direction for stage 2
Enable or disable the inrush
restraint for stage 2
Enable or disable the
direction for inverse stage
Enable or disable the inrush
restraint for inverse stage
Enable or disable inrush
restraint by I2/I1 or I02/I01

43

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Bit

Default

1.15

EF U2/I2 Dir Off

EF U2/I2 Dir On

2.7

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

3I0 measured or calculated

2.8

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

3U0 measured or calculated

2.11

Blk EF_CT Fail

UnBlk EF_CT Fail

2.14

UnBlk Fun_VT Fail

Blk Fun_VT Fail

4.2

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

4.3

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

1.5

Explanation
Enable or disable the
negative sequence direction

Enable or disable the function


of CT fail blocking
Enable or disable the function
of VT fail blocking
Stage 1 of overcurrent
protection alarm or trip
Inverse stage of overcurrent
protection alarm or trip

IED reports
Table 16 Event information list

Information

Description

EF1 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command

EF2 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command

EF Inv Trip

Earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command

Inrush Blk

Inrush is detected to block function.


Table 17 Alarm information list

Information

Description

EF1 Alarm

Earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

EF Inv Alarm

Earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

1.6

Technical data
Table 18 Technical data for earth fault protection

Item

Rang or value

Tolerance

Definite time characteristic

44

Current

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3% setting or 0.02Ir

Time delay

0.00 to 60.00s, step 0.01s

1% setting or +40ms, at 200%


operating setting

Reset time

approx. 40ms

Reset ratio

Approx. 0.95 at I/Ir 0.5

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Inverse time characteristics


Current

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3% setting or 0.02Ir

IEC standard

Normal inverse;

IEC60255-151

Very inverse;

5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Extremely inverse;

<I/ISETTING < 20

Long inverse
ANSI

Inverse;

ANSI/IEEE C37.112,

Short inverse;

5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Long inverse;

<I/ISETTING < 20

Moderately inverse;
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
user-defined characteristic

IEC60255-151

T=

5% setting + 40ms, at 2
<I/ISETTING < 20

Time factor of inverse time, A

0.005 to 200.0s, step


0.001s

Delay of inverse time, B

0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s

Index of inverse time, P

0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005

set time Multiplier for step n: k

0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01

Minimum operating time

20ms

Maximum operating time

100s

Reset mode

instantaneous

Reset time

approx. 40ms
Directional element

Operating area range of zero


sequence directional element
Characteristic angle
Operating area range of negative
sequence directional element
Characteristic angle

160

3, at 3U01V

0to 90, step 1


160

3, at 3U22V

50to 90, step 1

45

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

46

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault


protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for sensitive earth fault protection.

47

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Sensitive overcurrent protection

1.1

Introduction
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is
significantly smaller than load current and phase to phase short circuit
currents. Another difficulty for earth fault protection is that the magnitude of
the phase to earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in
the network.
Sensitive earth fault protection can be used to detect and give selective trip of
phase to earth faults in isolated or compensated networks. The protection
function also can be applied to detect high impedance earth faults in solidly or
low-resistance earthed networks.
Sensitive earth fault protection integrated in the IED provides following
features:

Two definite time stages

One inverse time stage

11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves as well as


optional user defined characteristic

Sensitive earth fault directional element with U0/I0- principle

Sensitive earth fault directional element with Cos principle

Settable directional element characteristic angle to satisfy the different


network conditions and applications

Each stage can be set to be directional, or non-directional independently

Each stage can be set individually to alarm or trip

Displacement voltage can be checked to increase function reliability

Dedicated sensitive CT

VT secondary circuit supervision for directional protection function

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Time characteristic

48

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

The time characteristic for each stage can be chosen as definite time stage or
some type of inverse time characteristic. 11 kinds of inverse time
characteristics are available. It is also possible to create a user defined time
characteristic. Each stage can operate in conjunction with the integrated
directional functions and operate based on measured phase current which is
injected from the dedicated sensitive current transformer.
Furthermore, each stage is independent from each other and can be
combined as desired.
Pickup value for the definite stage can be set in setting value. The measured
current from sensitive CT input is compared with the corresponding setting
value with delay time. If the measured current exceeds the associated pickup
value, after expiry of the time delay, the trip command or alarm signal is
issued. The dropout value of the definite stages is approximately equal to 96%
of the pickup value.
The time delay of inverse time characteristic is calculated based on the type
of the set characteristic, the magnitude of the current and a time multiplier.
For the inverse time characteristic, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves
are available, and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using the
following equation:

K_SEF

Equation 5

where:
A_SEF: Time factor for inverse time stage
B_SEF: Delay time for inverse time stage
P_SEF: index for inverse time stage
K_SEF: Time multiplier

By applying proper setting of the aforementioned parameters, the IED


calculates the tripping or alarming time from the measured current in each
phase separately. Once the calculated time has been elapsed, the trip signal
or alarm signal is issued.

1.2.2

Direction determination feature


49

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

The integrated directional function can be applied to each stage of sensitive


earth fault element via specified binary setting. In order to discriminate
forward or reverse short circuits, the IED provides two methods for sensitive
earth fault direction detection which should be utilized to cover all network
configurations according to the type of grounding. Based on U0/I0-
measurement and based on Cos measurement respectively.
When the U0/I0- or Cos elements used for directional sensitive earth fault
protection, the VT failure condition may result in false or undesired tripping or
alarming. In such situation, it is possible to set operation state for each stage
of sensitive earth fault protection which operates in conjunction with direction
feature by binary setting to block the function or operate without direction
detection. When binary setting is set to UnBlk Fun_VTFail, corresponding
sensitive earth fault stages would not consider direction in case of VT failure.
When it is set to Blk Fun_VTFail, the function will be blocked when VT
failure happens. It is noted that the binary setting affects all the stages of
sensitive earth fault element.
Pay attention to that direction determination based on measured
displacement voltage will not be blocked in case of failure detection in the
three-phase connected to voltage transformer. Similarly, if the direction
determination is based on the calculated displacement voltage, the protection
function will not be blocked as a result of failure detection in U4 voltage
transformer. However, in case of a failure in U4 voltage transformer, the
direction determination based on measured value of displacement voltage will
be blocked depend on the binary setting UnBlk Fun_VTFail/Blk Fun_VTFail
enabled or disabled.

1.2.2.1

U0/I0- measurement
In this method, the direction determination is performed by comparing the
displacement angle between zero sequence system quantities. In current
path, the measured current Is from the sensitive input is applied. In the
voltage path, the displacement voltage VN is used as reference voltage, if it is
connected, and the binary setting 3U0 Measured is enabled. Otherwise the
IED calculates the zero sequence voltage 3V0 from the summation of the
three phase voltages if setting 3U0 Calculated is enabled. The condition for
direction determination with 3V0 quantity is that the magnitude of 3V0 is larger
than the setting U_3V0_SEF
Contrary to the directional phase elements, which work with the un-faulted
voltage as reference voltage, for the sensitive earth fault protection, the zero
sequence voltage is used as the reference voltage for direction determination.
Depending on the connection of voltage transformer (setting 3U0

50

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Measured/3U0 Calculated), the corresponding reference voltage is VN or 3V0


(3V0=VA+VB+VC).

Forward

90

- I NS

Bisector

NS_Char

3U0_Ref

I NS

Figure 13 Direction detection characteristic of the sensitive earth fault


directional element by U0/I0-
where:
NS_Char: The settable characteristic angle

In order to satisfy different network conditions and applications, the reference


voltage can be rotated by adjustable angle between 0and 90in
anticlockwise direction (positive sign). It should be noted that the settings
affect all the directional stages of sensitive earth fault element. In this way, the
vector of rotated reference voltage can be closely adjusted to the vector of
fault current -Is which leads the fault voltage 3V0 by the fault angle NS_Char.
This would provide the best possible result for the direction determination.
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse area. The
forward area is in range of 80around the rotated reference voltage.

1.2.2.2

Cos measurement
Similar to U0/I0- method, the direction determination is performed in cos
method by using the measured current Is from sensitive current input together
with the measured or calculated displacement voltage. In this context, the
measured displacement voltage is used if it is connected, and the binary
setting 3U0 Measured is enabled. Otherwise the IED calculates the zero
sequence voltage 3V0 from the summation of the three phase voltages if
setting 3U0 Calculated is enabled. The condition for direction determination
with 3V0 quantity is that the magnitude of 3V0 is larger than the setting
U_3V0_SEF.
51

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Unlike to U0/I0- method, direction determination is performed in Cos


method by using those component of the residual current which is
perpendicular to the directional characteristic (axis of symmetry). Figure 14
shows how the IED adopts complex vector diagram for direction
determination. As can be seen, displacement voltage 3V0 is the reference
magnitude quantity. The axis of symmetry is defined as a line perpendicular to
this quantity. The sensitive earth fault protection would issue a trip command
or an alarm signal if the active component of Is is in the opposite direction of
the reference voltage and has a magnitude exceeds setting IsCOS_SEF.

IS

90

Forward

3U0_Ref

- IS

Figure 14 Direction detection characteristic of the sensitive earth fault


directional element by Cos

1.2.3

Logic diagram
U0/I0-

SEF Chk U0/I0

AND

Forward

3U0>

Figure 15 Logic diagram for direction determination based on U0/I0- measurement

IsCOS

SEF Chk Iscos

AND

Forward

3U0>

Figure 16 Logic diagram for direction determination based on Cos measurement

52

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

VT Fail

Blk Fun_VTFail

OR

3U0 Calculated

AND

Forward

OR

Forward Release

AND
V1p VT Fail

Blk Fun_VTFail

OR

3U0 Measured

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

Figure 17 Influence of VT failure on direction determination of sensitive earth fault protection

Is >
Func_SEF1
T

AND

Trip/Alarm

SFF1 Dir Off


Forward Release
SEF1 Dir On

Figure 18 Logic diagram for the first definite stage of sensitive earth fault protection

Is Inverse
Func_SEF Inv
AND

Trip/Alarm

SFF Inv Dir Off


Forward Release
SEF Inv Dir On

Figure 19 Logic diagram for the inverse time stage of sensitive earth fault protection

1.3

Input and output signals

53

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

IS

SEF1 Trip
SEF1 Alarm
SEF2 Trip
SEF2 Alarm
SEF Inv Trip
SEF Inv Alarm

UP1
UP2
UP3

Table 19 Analog input list


Signal

Description

Is

Signal for sensitive current input

UP1

Signal for voltage input 2

UP2

Signal for voltage input 2

UP3

Signal for voltage input 3


Table 20 Binary output list

Signal

Description

SEF1 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 trip

SEF1 Alarm

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 alarm

SEF2 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 trip

SEF2 Alarm

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 alarm


Sensitive earth fault protection inverse time

SEF Inv Trip

stage trip
Sensitive earth fault protection inverse time

SEF Inv Alarm

stage alarm

1.4

Setting parameters

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 21 Function setting list for sensitive earth fault protection

NO.

1.

54

Default

In

Abbr.

I_SEF1

Explanation
Sensitive current
setting for stage 1

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.005

1.00

(SEF)

(SEF)

0.05In

20.00In

(Normal)

(Normal)

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

Unit

Min.

Max.

2.

0.4

T_SEF1

Time delay for stage 1

0.00

60.00

0.005

1.00

(SEF)

(SEF)

0.05In

20.00In

(Normal)

(Normal)

0.00

60.00

12

0.005

1.00

(SEF)

(SEF)

0.05In

20.00In

(Normal)

(Normal)

0.05

999.0

0.001

1000

0.01

10.00

0.000

60.00

degree

0.00

90.00

0.005

1.00

2.00

100.0

3.

1.5In

4.

0.1

5.

I_SEF2

T_SEF2
Curve_SEF
Inv

Sensitive current

setting for stage 2


Time delay for stage 2

Inverse time curve


Sensitive current

6.

0.5In

I_SEF Inv

setting for inverse

stage
7.

K_SEF Inv

8.

12

A_SEF Inv

9.

P_SEF Inv

10.

B_SEF Inv

Time multiplier
Time factor for inverse
time stage

Index for inverse time


stage
Delay time for inverse
time stage
Characteristic angle

11.

30

Angle_SEF

for U0/I0-
measurement
Sensitve current for

12.

0.01

IsCOS_SEF

direction determination
of IsCos
measurement

13.

20

U_3V0_SEF

Voltage threshold for


direction determination

Table 22 Logical linker list for sensitive earth fault protection


NO.

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

Func_SEF1

Enable or disable the stage 1 of sensitive earth fault protection

2.

Func_SEF2

Enable or disable the stage 2 of sensitive earth fault protection

3.

Func_SEF Inv

Enable or disable the inverse time stage of sensitive earth


fault protection

Table 23 Binary setting list for sensitive earth fault protection


Bit

2.1

SEF1 Dir Off

SEF1 Dir On

Explanation
Enable or disable the direction for

55

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Bit

Explanation
stage 1

2.2

SEF2 Dir Off

SEF2 Dir On

2.3

SEF Inv Dir Off

SEF Inv Dir On

2.4

SEF Chk Iscos

SEF Chk U0/I0

2.8

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

2.14

UnBlk Fun_VT Fail

Blk Fun_VT Fail

4.4

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

4.5

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

4.6

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

1.5

Enable or disable the direction for


stage 2
Enable or disable the direction for
inverse stage
Direction determination by U0/I0-
measurement or IsCos measurement
3U0 measured or calculated
Enable or disable the function of VT fail
blocking
Stage 1 of sensitive earth fault
protection alarm or trip
Stage 2 of sensitive earth fault
protection alarm or trip
Inverse stage of sensitive earth fault
protection alarm or trip

IED reports
Table 24 Event information list

Information

Description

SEF1 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command

SEF2 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command

SEF Inv Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command


Table 25 Alarm information list

Information

Description

SEF1 Alarm

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

SEF2 Alarm

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues an alarm signal

SEF Inv Alarm

Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

1.6

Technical data
Table 26 Technical data for sensitive earth fault protection

Item

Range or value

Tolerance

Definite time characteristic


Current from sensitive CT input

56

0.005 to 1.000 A , step 0.001 A

3 % setting value or 1 mA

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Current from neutral CT input

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3 % setting value or 0.02 Ir

Time delay

0.00 to 60.00, step 0.01 s

1.5 % setting value or +40


ms, at 200% operating setting

Reset ratio

Approx. 0.95 when I/In 0.5

Reset time

Approx. 40 ms
Inverse time characteristics

Current from sensitive input

0.005 to 1.000 A , step 0.001 A

3 % setting value or 1 mA

Current from normal input

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3 % setting value or 0.02 Ir

IEC standard

Normal inverse;

5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Very inverse;

<I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance

Extremely inverse;

with IEC60255-151

Long inverse
ANSI

Inverse;

5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Short inverse;

<I/ISETTING < 20, in

Long inverse;

accordance with ANSI/IEEE

Moderately inverse;

C37.112,

Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
5% setting + 40ms, at 2

user-defined characteristic
T=

A
i
P
I SET

B k

Time factor of inverse time, A

0.005 to 200.0s, step 0.001s

Delay of inverse time, B

0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s

Index of inverse time, P

0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005

set time Multiplier for step n: k

0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01

Minimum operating time

20ms

Maximum operating time

100s

Reset mode

instantaneous

Reset time

approx. 40ms

<I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance


with IEC60255-151

Directional element for sensitive earth-fault protection


principles

I cos
(V0 / I0)

Direction measurement

IE and VE measured
or 3V0 calculated

3U0 Minimum voltage threshold

2.00 to 100.00 V, step 0.01 V

3 % setting for measured


voltage;
5 % setting for calculated
voltage

Characteristic angle _SEFChar

0.0to 90.0, step 1

57

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Operating area range

58

160

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

59

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

Negative-sequence overcurrent
protection

1.1

Introduction
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection detects unbalanced loads on the
system. It is especially useful to monitor the unbalanced load of motors. This
is due to the fact that unbalanced loads create counter-rotating fields in
three-phase induction motors, which cause overheating in rotor end zones. In
addition, the protection function may be used to detect interruptions, short
circuits and polarity problems with current transformers. Furthermore, it is
suitable for detecting single-phase and two-phase faults with fault currents
lower than load currents.
The protection provide following features:

Two definite time stages

One inverse time stage

11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves as well as


optional user defined characteristic

The first definite stage and inverse stage can be set individually as alarm
or trip stage

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Protection function description


The IED provides three negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages
from which two stages operate as definite time stages and the other one
operates with inverse time-current characteristic. The negative-sequence
overcurrent protection operates based on negative sequence current
calculated from three phase currents, as follows:

Equation 6

60

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Furthermore, each stage is independent from each other and can be
combined as desired.
Individual pickup value for each definite stage can be set in setting value. The
calculated negative sequence current from Equation 6 is compared
separately with the corresponding setting value with delay time. If the
calculated negative-sequence current exceeds the associated pickup value,
after expiry of the time delay, the trip command or alarm signal is issued. The
drop out value of the definite stages is approximately equal to 95% of the
pickup value for I/In 0.5.
The time delay of inverse time characteristic is calculated based on the type
of the set characteristic, the magnitude of the current and a time multiplier.
For the inverse time characteristic, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves
are available, and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using the
following equation:

K_NSOC

Equation 7
where:
A_NSOC: Time factor for inverse time stage
B_NSOC: Delay time for inverse time stage
P_NSOC: index for inverse time stage
K_NSOC: Time multiplier

By applying proper setting of the aforementioned parameters, the IED


calculates the tripping or alarming time from the measured current in each
phase separately. Once the calculated time has been elapsed, the trip signal
or alarm signal is issued.

1.2.2

Logic diagram

61

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
CT Fail
AND
3I2 > 3I2_NSOC1

T1

NS1 Trip/Alarm

T2

NS2 Trip/Alarm

Func_NSOC1 On

AND
Func_NSOC2 On

3I2 > 3I2_NSOC2

AND

NS INV Trip/Alarm

3I2 > 3I2_NSOC Inv

Func_NSOC Inv

Figure 20 Logic diagram for negative-sequence overcurrent protection

1.3

Input and output signals

1.4

Setting parameters

IP1
IP2
IP3

NSOC1 Trip
NSOC1 Alarm
NSOC2 Trip
NSOC2 Alarm
NSOC Inv Trip
NSOC Inv Alarm

Table 27 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

Signal for current input 1

IP2

Signal for current input 2

IP3

Signal for current input 3


Table 28 Binary output list

Signal
NSOC1 Trip

62

Description
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
stage 1 trip

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Negative sequence overcurrent protection

NSOC1 Alarm

stage 1 alarm
Negative sequence overcurrent protection

NSOC2 Trip

stage 2 trip
Negative sequence overcurrent protection

NSOC2 Alarm

stage 2 alarm
Negative sequence overcurrent protection

NSOC Inv Trip

inverse time stage trip


Negative sequence overcurrent protection

NSOC Inv Alarm

1.4.1

inverse time stage alarm

Setting list
Table 29 Function setting list for negative-sequence overcurrent protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.05In

20.00In

0.00

60.00

0.05In

20.00In

0.00

60.00

12

0.05In

20.00In

0.05

999.0

0.001

1000

0.01

10.00

0.000

60.00

Negative sequence
1.

In

3I2_NSOC1

current setting for


stage 1 of NSOC
protection

2.

0.4

T_NSOC1

Time setting for stage


1 of NSOC protection
Negative sequence

3.

1.5In

3I2_NSOC2

current setting for


stage 2 of NSOC
protection

4.

0.1

5.

T_NSOC2
Curve_NSO
C Inv

Time setting for stage


2 of NSOC protection
Inverse time curve
Negative sequence

6.

0.5In

3I2_NSOC

current setting for

Inv

inverse stage of NSOC

protection
7.

K_NSOC Inv

8.

0.056

A_NSOC Inv

9.

0.02

P_NSOC Inv

10.

B_NSOC Inv

Time multiplier
Time factor for inverse
time stage

Index for inverse time


stage
Delay time for inverse
time stage

63

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Table 30 Logical linker list for negative-sequence overcurrent protection
NO.

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

Func_NSOC1

Enable or disable the stage 1 of negative sequence protection

2.

Func_NSOC2

Enable or disable the stage 2 of negative sequence protection

3.

Func_NSOC Inv

Enable or disable the inverse time stage of negative sequence


protection

Table 31 Binary setting list for negative-sequence overcurrent protection


0

4.7

NSOC1 Alarm

NSOC1 Trip

4.8

NSOC Inv Alarm

NSOC Inv Trip

Bit

1.5

Explanation
Stage 1 of negative sequence
overcurrent protection alarm or trip
Inverse stage of negative sequence
overcurrent protection alarm or trip

IED reports
Table 32 Event information list

Information

Description

NSOC1 Trip

Negative sequence current protection stage 1 issues trip command

NSOC2 Trip

Negative sequence current protection stage 2 issues trip command

NSOC Inv Trip

Negative sequence current protection inverse stage issues trip command


Table 33 Alarm information list

Information

Description

NSOC1 Alarm

Negative sequence current protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

NSOC Inv Alarm

Negative sequence current protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

1.6

Technical data
Table 34 Technical data for negative sequence overcurrent protection

Item

Rang or Value

Tolerance

Definite time characteristic

64

Current

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3% setting value or 0.02Ir

Time delay

0.00 to 60.00, step 0.01 s

1% setting or +40ms, at
200% operating setting

Reset time

40 ms

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
Reset ratio

Approx. 0.95 for I2 /Ir > 0.5


Inverse time characteristics

Current

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3% setting or 0.02Ir

IEC standard

Normal inverse;

5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Very inverse;

<I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance

Extremely inverse;

with IEC60255-151

Long inverse
ANSI

Inverse;

5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Short inverse;

<I/ISETTING < 20, in

Long inverse;

accordance with ANSI/IEEE

Moderately inverse;

C37.112,

Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
user-defined characteristic

T=

A
i
P
I SET

B k

5% setting + 40ms, at 2
<I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance
with IEC60255-151

Time factor of inverse time, A

0.005 to 200.0s, step 0.001s

Delay of inverse time, B

0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s

Index of inverse time, P

0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005

set time Multiplier for step n: k

0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01

Minimum operating time

20ms

Maximum operating time

100s

Reset time

approx. 40ms

65

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

66

Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

Chapter 7 Thermal overload


protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and
output signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and
technical data used for thermal overload protection.

67

Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

Thermal overload protection

1.1

Introduction
The thermal overload protection represents an essential requirement to
prevent protected equipment from thermal damaging due to overloads.
Thermal damage mostly affects the insulating material surrounding the phase
current conductors in transformers, cables or any other power equipment. As
a matter of fact, the insulation material ages too rapidly if the equipment
temperature exceeds the design limit value. Thus, a special protection is
needed to prevent over-temperature condition for the protected object. Since
severity of over-temperature condition is directly proportional to current
squared, the thermal protection operates based on the square of measured
current flowing through the protected object. Furthermore, because the
cumulative nature of over-temperature condition, it is necessary to integrate
previous thermal history of equipment in the protection. This is achieved in
the IED by providing a comprehensive thermal replica of the protected object.
In this regard, the IED provides an overload protection with memory capability
by taking into account both the previous history of an overload and the heat
loss to the environment.

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Function description
The thermal overload protection in the IED is provided with one trip stage as
well as one alarm stage. It is possible to set the alarm stage at a certain
percentage of the setting value applied at the trip stage. They protection
function operates based on an approximate replica of the protected object in
the event of temperature rise caused by overload. The thermal replica is
implemented based on thermal models (Cold or Hot Curve) of IEC60255-8
standard. The temperature rise is calculated separately for each phase in a
thermal replica from the square of the respective phase current. The
maximum calculated temperature rise of the three phases is decisive for
evaluation of the thresholds.
The IED calculates the temperature rise of the protected equipment in each
phase, based on following differential equation:

68

Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

Equation 8
where:
: is thermal time constant of heating for the protected object, in seconds. It is usually
determined by manufacturer of the protected object. This parameter can be set in
setting value.
I: is the measured fundamental current flowing through each phase of the protected
object.
: is the maximum permissible continuous thermal overload current. It is usually
specified by manufacturer of the protected object. This parameter can be set in
setting value.

: is temperature rise of the protected object in per unit of the final temperature rise
at maximum allowed phase current

According to Equation 8, the tripping time for thermal overload protection is


calculated by the following equation based on Hot Curve in IEC60255-8
standard:

Equation 9
where:
IP: is steady state current previous to the overload.

The IED is capable to calculate tripping time of thermal overload protection


not only based on the Hot Curve, but also based on Cold Curve as defined in
IEC60255-8 standard and equation as following:

Equation 10

From the Equation 9 and Equation 10 can be seen, the cold curve provides
no memory regarding to previous thermal condition of the protected object,
69

Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

whereas, by using the hot curve, the protection function is able to represent a
memorized thermal profile of the protected object. It is possible to set which
curve should be considered for thermal overload protection by binary setting
Hot Curve/Cold Curve. If Hot Curve is enabled, tripping time of thermal
overload protection would be calculated based on Equation 9. In contrast, if
applying Cold Curve, Equation 10 would be used for calculation process. It
is noted that binary setting Hot Curve/Cold Curve affects both the alarm and
trip stages.

1.3

Input and output signals

1.4

Setting parameters
IP1
IP2

Thermal OL Trip
Thermal OL Alarm

IP3

Table 35 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

Signal for current input 1

IP2

Signal for current input 2

IP3

Signal for current input 3


Table 36 Binary output list

Signal

Description

Thermal OL Trip

Thermal overload protection trip

Thermal OL Alarm

Thermal overload protection alarm

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 37 Function setting list for thermal overload protection

70

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

In

I_Therm OL

Explanation
Current setting for thermal
overload protection

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.10In

10.00In

Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

2.

60

T_Const Therm

3.

Ratio_Cool

4.

0.9

Ratio_Alarm

Unit

Min.

Max.

6.0

9999

0.100

10.00

0.500

1.000

Time constant for thermal


overload protection
Cool ratio for Hot Curve of
thermal overload protection
Alarm ratio for thermal
overload protection

Table 38 Logical linker list for thermal overload protection


NO.

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

Func_ThermOL

Enable or disable the thermal overload protection

Table 39 Binary setting list for thermal overload protection


Bit

Description

2.5

Therm Alarm Off

Therm Alarm On

2.6

Hot Curve

Cold Curve

1.5

Enable or disable the alarm function of


thermal overload protection
Enable or disable the Hot Curve or Cold
Curve

IED reports
Table 40 Event information list

Information

Description

Therm OL Trip

Thermal overload protection issues trip command


Table 41 Alarm information list

Information

Description

Therm OL Alarm

Thermal overload protection issues an alarm signal

1.6

Technical data
Table 42 Technical data for thermal overload protection

Item

Rang or Value

Current

0.1 Ir to 5.00 Ir

Thermal heating time constant

1 to 9999 s

Tolerance
3% setting or 0.02Ir

71

Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

Thermal cooling time constant

72

1 to 9999 s

IEC cold curve

I eq2
t ln 2
2
I eq I

IEC 602558,
5% setting or +40ms

IEC hot curve

I eq2 I P2
t ln 2
2
I eq I

IEC 602558,
5% setting or +40ms

Chapter 8 Current overload protection

Chapter 8 Current overload


protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for current overload protection.

73

Chapter 8 Current overload protection

Current overload protection

1.1

Function description
The purpose of the overload protection is used to protect the capacitor bank
against the faults that occur normally by over-voltage which results in
dielectric breakdown. Alarm function and trip function are provided, which can
be enabled or disabled separately.

1.1.1

Logic diagram

Ia>
Ib>

OR

Func_OL

Talarm

Alarm

OL Alarm On

Ic>

Ia>>
Ib>>

OR

Func_OL

Ttrip

Ic>>

Figure 21 Logic diagram for current overload protection

1.2

Input and output signals


IP1
IP2
IP3

Overload Alarm
Overload Trip

Table 43 Analog input list

74

Signal

Description

IP1

Signal for current input 1

IP2

Signal for current input 2

Trip

Chapter 8 Current overload protection

IP3

Signal for current input 3


Table 44 Binary output list

Signal

Description

Thermal OL Trip

Thermal overload protection trip

Thermal OL Alarm

Thermal overload protection alarm

1.3

Setting parameter

1.3.1

Setting list
Table 45 Function setting list for current overload protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

1.5In

I_OL Alarm

2.

T_OL Alarm

3.

1.2In

I_OL Trip

4.

10

T_OL Trip

Current setting for alarm of


overload protection
Time setting for alarm of
overload protection
Current setting for trip of
overload protection
Time setting for trip of overload
protection

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.05In

20.00In

0.10

6000.0

0.05In

20.00In

0.10

6000.0

Table 46 Logical linker list for thermal overload protection


NO.

Abbr.

1.

Explanation

Func_OL

Enable or disable the overload protection

Table 47 Binary setting list for thermal overload protection


Bit

4.7

OL Alarm Off

OL Alarm On

1.4

Explanation
Enable or disable the alarm
function of overload protection

IED reports
Table 48 Event information list

Information

Description

75

Chapter 8 Current overload protection

Information

Description

OL Trip

Over load protection issues trip command


Table 49 Alarm information list

76

Information

Description

OL Alarm

Over load protection issues an alarm signal

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for overvoltage protection.

77

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Overvoltage protection

1.1

Introduction
The overvoltage protection detects abnormal network and machine high
voltage conditions. Overvoltage conditions may occur possibly in the power
system during abnormal conditions such as no-load, light load, or open line
end on long line. The protection can be used as open line end detector or as
system voltage supervision normally.
The protection provides following features:

Two definite time stages

First stage can be set to alarm or trip

Measuring voltage between phase-earth voltage and phase-phase


(selectable)

Three phase or single phase voltage connection

Settable dropout ratio

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Overvoltage protection principle


Overvoltage protection element provides two definite time stages which can
be enabled or disabled separately according to the users requirement using
dedicated binary setting Func_OV1 and Func_OV2. The first stage can be
used for tripping or alarming, whereas the second stage is dedicated for
tripping purposes. It is possible to select the operation mode of the first stage
of overvoltage protection using binary setting OV1 Alarm/OV1 Trip. As
expected, setting OV1 Alarm makes it work as an alarming stage, while by
applying OV1 Trip, it is possible to use the first stage as a tripping stage.
Voltage thresholds and time delays can be set individually for each element.
Thus, alarming or tripping can be time-coordinated depending on how severe
the voltage increases are, i.e. in case of a high overvoltage, trip command
can be issued with a short time delay, whereas in case of less severe
overvoltage, trip or alarm command can be issued with a longer time delay. In
this context, settings U_OV1 and T_OV1 correspond to the voltage
threshold and time delay of the first stage. Similarly, settings U_OV2 and
T_OV2 are related to the second stage. The dropout ratio for both the
overvoltage stages can be set through setting Dropout_OV.

78

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Overvoltage protection can operate based on phase to earth voltages VA-N,


VB-N, VC-N or phase to phase voltage VA-B, VB-C, VC-A. The IED is
informed about users preference by binary setting OV PP/OV PE. By
setting OV PP, calculation would be based on phase to phase voltages.
However, by setting OV PE, phase to ground voltages would be employed
in calculation.

1.2.2

Voltage connection
A

B
C

B
C

VA
VB
VC

VA
VB
VC
VN

VN
CSC-211

CSC-211
Case B

Case A

A
B
C

A
B
C

VA
VB
VC
VN
CSC-211

VA
VB
VC
VN
CSC-211
Case C

Case D

Figure 22 Connection example for overvoltage protection

As can be seen from Figure 22, overvoltage protection is suitable for different
connections of voltage transformer. Overvoltage protection is capable to
operate not only with three phase to earth voltages connection (Case A and
Case B) but also with only one phase to phase voltage (Case C) or phase to
earth voltage (Case D). If only one phase to phase voltage is connected to the
IED, it can be connected to the VA-VB, VB-VC or VC-VA input of the relay. In
this case, overvoltage protection should be set to operate based on OV PP.
Similarly, by connection of one phase to earth voltage to the device, it can be
connected to the VA-VN, VB-VN or VC-VN input of the relay. Furthermore,
overvoltage protection should be set to operate based on OV PE. It should
be noted that if the IED is only provided with one phase to phase voltage, it is
79

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

impossible to calculate phase to earth voltage accurately. This is because the


fact that there is no earth voltage connected to the IED.
It is noted that despite the capability of overvoltage protection to operate
properly with one phase to phase or one phase to earth voltage, maybe there
are some limitation may exist in operation of other protection functions, in
these conditions. For example, direction determination based on three phase
voltages would not operate with one voltage transformer connected.
Furthermore, depending on the application, voltage transformers may be
installed either on the source side or the load side of the associated circuit
breaker. However, these different arrangements have no influence in
behavior of the overvoltage protection.
As mentioned previously, according to different requirements, stage 1 of the
overvoltage protection can be set to trip or alarm, whereas stage 2 is
dedicated for trip. If the setting OV1 Alarm is applied, the alarm output of
respective stage would be marshaled to ALARM contact. On the contrary, if
setting OV1 Trip is applied, the trip command of respective stage can be
configured at different output modules by using the trip binary setting. It
should be noted that the protection functions which are marshaled.

1.2.3

Logic diagram

Ua>
Ub>

OR
OV PE
Func_OV1

Uc>

OR

Uab>
Ubc>

OR
OV PP

Uca>

Figure 23 Overvoltage stage 1 operation logic

80

T1

Trip/Alarm

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Ua>>
OR

Ub>>

OV PE

Uc>>

Func_OV2

OR

T2

Trip

Uab>>
OR

Ubc>>

OV PP

Uca>>

Figure 24 Overvoltage stage 2 operation logic

1.3

Input and output signals


UP1
UP2
UP3

OV1_Trip
OV2_Trip
OV1 Alarm
OV2 Alarm

Table 50 Analog input list


Signal

Description

UP1

Signal for voltage input 1

UP2

Signal for voltage input 2

UP3

Signal for voltage input 3


Table 51 Binary output list

Signal

Description

OV1 Alarm

Overvoltage protection stage 1 alarm

OV2 Alarm

Overvoltage protection stage 2 alarm

OV1_Trip

Overvoltage protection stage 1 trip

OV2_Trip

Overvoltage protection stage 2 trip

1.4

Setting parameters

1.4.1

Setting list
81

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Table 52 Function setting list for overvoltage protection


NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

70

U_OV1

2.

0.1

T_OV1

3.

70

U_OV2

4.

0.1

T_OV2

5.

0.95

Dropout_OV

The voltage setting


for OV stage 1
The time setting for
OV stage 1
The voltage setting
for OV stage 2
The time setting for
OV stage 2

Unit
V

Min.

Max.

40.00 (PE)

100.0(PE)

80.00(PP)

200.0(PP)

0.00

60.00

40.00 (PE)

100.0(PE)

80.00(PP)

200.0(PP)

0.00

60.00

0.90

0.99

The dropout ratio for


OV protection

Table 53 Logical linker list for overvoltage protection


NO.

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

Func_OV1

Enable or disable the overvoltage stage 1

2.

Func_OV2

Enable or disable the overvoltage stage 2

Table 54 Binary setting list for overvoltage protection


0

Bit

KG3.3

OV PP

OV PE

KG4.12

OV1 Alarm

OV1 Trip

1.5

Explanation
Selection overvoltage connection
as PP or PE
Selection overvoltage protection
as alarm or trip

IED reports
Table 55 Event information list

Information

Description

OV1 Trip

Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command

OV2 Trip

Overvoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command


Table 56 Alarm information list

82

Information

Description

OV1 Alarm

Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

1.6

Technical data
Table 57 Technical data for overvoltage protection

Item
Voltage connection

Rang or Value
Phase-to-phase voltages or

Tolerance
3 % setting or 1 V

phase-to-earth voltages
Phase to earth voltage

40 to 100 V, step 1 V

3 % setting or 1 V

Phase to phase voltage

80 to 200 V, step 1 V

3 % setting or 1 V

Reset ratio

0.90 to 0.99, step 0.01

3 % setting

Time delay

0.00 to 60.00 s, step 0.01s

1 % setting or +50 ms, at


120% operating setting

Reset time

<40ms

83

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

84

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and
output signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and
technical data used for undervoltage protection.

85

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Undervoltage protection

1.1

Introduction
The undervoltage protection provides protection against dangerous voltage
drops, especially for electric machines.
The protection function provides following features:

Two definite time stages

First stage can be set to alarm or trip

Measuring voltage between phase-earth voltage and phase-phase


selectable

Current criteria supervision

Circuit breaker aux. contact supervision

VT secondary circuit supervision, the undervoltage function will be


blocked when VT failure happens

Settable dropout ratio

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Protection function description


Undervoltage protection element provides two definite time stages which can
be enabled or disabled separately according to the users requirement using
dedicated binary settings Fun_UV1 and Fun_UV2. The first stage can be
used for tripping or alarming, whereas the second stage is dedicated for
tripping purposes. It is possible to select the operation mode of the first stage
of undervoltage protection using binary setting UV1 Alarm/ UV1 Trip. As
expected, setting UV1 Alarm makes it work as an alarming stage, while by
applying UV1 Trip it is possible to set the first stage as a tripping
undervoltage stage. Voltage thresholds and time delays can be set
individually for each element. Thus, alarming or tripping can be
time-coordinated depending on how severe the voltage collapses are. In this
context, settings U_UV1 and T_UV1 correspond to the voltage threshold
and time delay of the first stage. Similarly, settings U_UV2 and T_UV2 are
related to the second stage. The dropout ratio for both the undervoltage
stages can be set through setting Dropout_UV.

86

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Undervoltage protection can operate based on phase to earth voltages VA-N,


VB-N, VC-N or phase to phase voltage VA-B, VB-C, VC-A . The IED is
informed about users preference by binary setting UV PP/ UV PE. By
setting UV PP, calculation would be based on phase to phase voltages.
However, by setting UV PE, phase to ground voltages would be employed in
calculation. Furthermore, it is possible to set the IED to operate either when
all the measured phase to earth voltages (or phase to phase voltages
according to the setting of UV PP/ UV PE) falls below the setting values
U_UV1 and U_UV2 or when at least one of the phase to earth voltages (or
at least one of the phase to phase voltages according to the setting of UV
PP/ UV PE) falls below the respective setting values U_UV1 and U_UV2.
This can be achieved by setting of binary setting UV Chk All Phase/UV Chk
One Phase. If setting UV Chk All Phase is applied, the undervoltage
protection would operate only if all of the phase to ground or phase to phase
voltages falls below the setting of U_UV1 and U_UV2. In contrast, if setting
UV Chk One Phase is applied, the protection would operate when at least
one of the phase to earth or phase to phase voltages drops below the
respective thresholds.

1.2.2

Voltage connection
A

B
C

B
C

VA
VB
VC

VA
VB
VC
VN

VN
CSC-211

CSC-211
Case B

Case A

A
B
C

A
B
C

VA
VB
VC
VN
CSC-211

VA
VB
VC
VN
CSC-211
Case C

Case D

Figure 25 Connection example for undervoltage protection

87

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

As can be seen from Figure 25, undervoltage protection is suitable for


different connections of voltage transformer. Undervoltage protection is
capable to operate not only with three phase to earth voltages connection
(Case A and Case B) but also with only one phase to phase voltage (Case C)
or phase to earth voltage (Case D). If only one phase to phase voltage is
connected to the IED, it can be connected to VA-VB, VB-VC or VC-VA input of
the IED and the IED should be informed by binary setting 1Ph V Connect. In
this case, undervoltage protection should be set to operate based on UV PP
and UV Chk All Phase. Similarly, by connection of one phase to earth
voltage to the device, it can be connected to VA-VN, VB-VN or VC-VN input of
the relay and the relay should be informed by control word 1Ph V Connect.
Furthermore, undervoltage protection should be set to operate based on UV
PE and UV Chk All Phase. It should be noted that if the IED is only provided
with one phase to phase voltage, it is impossible to calculate phase to earth
voltage accurately. This is because the fact that there is no earth voltage
connected to the IED.
It is noted that despite the capability of undervoltage protection to operate
properly by using only one phase to phase or one phase to earth voltage,
maybe there are some limitation in operation of other protection functions, in
these conditions. For example, direction determination based on three phase
voltages would not operate with one voltage transformer connected.

1.2.3

Depending on the VT location


Depending on the application, voltage transformers may be installed either on
the source side or the load side of the associated circuit breaker. These
different arrangements may lead to different behavior of the undervoltage
protection. When a tripping command is issued and the circuit breaker is
opened, full voltage remains on the source side while the load side voltage
becomes zero. In this case, undervoltage protection may remain picked up.
This problem is removed in the IED by integrating additional current criterion.
In this context, undervoltage pickup can be maintained only when the
undervoltage criterion satisfied and a minimum current (setting I_Chk) are
exceeded. The largest of the three phase currents is decisive. In other words,
subsequent to each pickup, the undervoltage protection would drop out as
soon as the current decreases below the setting of I_Chk. If the voltage
transformer is installed on the source side and it is not desired to check
current flow, this feature can be disabled by setting the minimum threshold of
I_Chk to 0. Furthermore, it is possible for the IED to integrate circuit breaker
position in operation logic of undervoltage protection. By employing this
feature, the IED would issue a trip command when the circuit breaker is
closed. In this regard, undervoltage protection would drop out when circuit

88

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

breaker is opened. This feature can be enabled by applying setting UV Chk


CB On in binary setting. This is mainly useful when voltage transformer is
installed on load side. However, if the voltage transformer is installed on the
source side and it is not desired to check circuit breaker position in
undervoltage protection, setting UV Chk CB Off should be applied in binary
setting.

1.2.4

Logic diagram

Ua<
Ub<

OR
UV Chk One Phase

Uc<

OR
UV PE

Ua<
Ub<

AND
UV Chk All Phase

Uc<
OR

UV stg1

Uab<
Ubc<

OR
UV Chk One Phase

Uca<
OR
UV PP

Uab<
Ubc<

AND
UV Chk All Phase

Uca<

Figure 26 Logic diagram for undervoltage stage 1

89

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Ua<<
OR

Ub<<

UV Chk One Phase

Uc<<

OR
UV PE

Ua<<
AND

Ub<<

UV Chk All Phase

Uc<<
OR

UV stg2

Uab<<
OR

Ubc<<

UV Chk One Phase

Uca<<
OR
UV PP

Uab<<
AND

Ubc<<

UV Chk All Phase

Uca<<

Figure 27 Logic diagram for undervoltage stage 2

UV stg1

Fun_UV1

AND

T1

Trip/Alarm

1
UV Chk CB Off

3Ph CB Open
UV Chk CB On

Cur.Flow
VT fail

OR
Note: CSC-211 V01 has no Cur.Flowcriterion

Figure 28 Logic diagram for undervoltage stage 1 operation

90

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

UV stg2

Fun_UV2

AND

T2

Trip

1
UV Chk CB Off

CB Open
UV Chk CB On

OR

Cur.Flow

Note: CSC-211 V01 has no Cur.Flowcriterion

VT fail

Figure 29 Logic diagram for undervoltage stage 2 operation

1.3

Input and output signals


UP1
UP2
UP3
IP1
IP2
IP3
Ph A CB Open
Ph B CB Open
Ph C CB Open

UV1 Trip
UV2 Trip
UV1 Alarm

Table 58 Analog input list


Signal

Description

UP1

signal for voltage input 1

UP2

signal for voltage input 2

UP3

signal for voltage input 3

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3


Table 59 Binary input list

Signal

Description

Ph A CB Open

Phase A open status of CB

Ph B CB Open

Phase B open status of CB

Ph C CB Open

Phase C open status of CB

91

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Table 60 Binary output list


Signal

Description

UV1 Alarm

Undervoltage protection stage 1 alarm

UV1_Trip

Undervoltage protection stage 1 trip

UV2_Trip

Undervoltage protection stage 2 trip

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 61 Function setting list for undervoltage protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

40

U_UV1

2.

0.1

T_UV1

3.

40

Explanation
Voltage setting for stage 1 of
undervoltage protection
Time setting for stage 1 of
undervoltage protection
Voltage setting for stage 2 of

U_UV2

undervoltage protection
Time setting for stage 2 of

4.

0.1

T_UV2

5.

1.05

Dropout_UV

6.

0.2In

I_Chk

undervoltage protection

Unit

Min.

Max.

5.00
(PE)
10.00
(PP)

75.0
(PE)
150.0
(PP)

0.00

120.0

5.00

(PP)

75.0
(PE)
150.0
(PP)

0.00

120.0

1.01

2.00

0.00In

2.00In

Dropout ratio for undervoltage


protection
Current setting for

undervoltage protection

(PE)
10.00

Table 62 Logical linker list for undervoltage protection


NO.

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

Func_UV1

Enable or disable the stage 1 of undervoltage protection

2.

Func_UV2

Enable or disable the stage 2 of undervoltage protection

Table 63 Binary setting list for undervoltage protection

92

Bit

2.9

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

Explanation
Single phase or three phase

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Bit

Explanation
voltage connection

UV Chk CB Off

3.0

UV Chk CB On

Enable or disable the function of


checking CB status
Enable or disable the function of

3.1

UV Chk All Phase

UV Chk One Phase

checking single phase or three


phase voltage

3.2

UV PP

UV PE

4.11

UV1 Alarm

UV1 Trip

1.5

Phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth
discrimination
Stage 1 of undervoltage
protection alarm or trip

IED reports
Table 64 Event information list

Information

Description

UV1 Trip

Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command

UV2 Trip

Undervoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command


Table 65 Alarm information list

Information

Description

UV1 Alarm

Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

1.6

Technical data
Table 66 Technical data for undervoltage protection

Item
Voltage connection

Rang or Value
Phase-to-phase voltages or

Tolerance
3 % setting or 1 V

phase-to-earth voltages
Phase to earth voltage

5 to 75 V , step 1 V

3 % setting or 1 V

Phase to phase voltage

10 to 150 V, step 1 V

3 % setting or 1 V

Reset ratio

1.01 to 2.00, step 0.01

3 % setting

Time delay

0.00 to 120.00 s, step 0.01 s

1 % setting or +50 ms, at 80%


operating setting

Current criteria

0.08 to 2.00 Ir

Reset time

50 ms

3% setting or 0.02Ir

93

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

94

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage


protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for displacement voltage protection.

95

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Displacement voltage protection

1.1

Introduction
In some applications, it is necessary to monitor the displacement voltage to
detect an earth fault in power system. This protection is usually applied in
networks where the earth fault current is limited.
The protection provide following features:

Two definite time stages

Each stage can be set to alarm or trip

Faulty phase discrimination

3U0 based on calculated summation of 3 phase voltage or measured


injected residual voltage

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Displacement voltage input


The displacement voltage 3V0 can be directly applied to the IED or can be
calculated based on the connected three phase to ground voltages
(3V0=VA+VB+VC). In the latter case, the three voltage inputs must be
connected to voltage transformers in a ground-wye configuration. If the IED is
only provided with phase to phase voltages or provided only one phase to
earth or phase to phase voltage, it is not possible to calculate a displacement
voltage. In this case, the direction cannot be determined for earth fault or
sensitive earth fault protection.
If the displacement voltage is directly applied to the IED and the binary setting
3U0 Measured is enabled, it is not affected by VT fail detection on
three-phase connected voltage. Similarly, if the displacement voltage is
calculated based on the three-phase voltages and the binary setting 3U0
Calculated is enabled, it would not be blocked as a result of failure detection
in U4 voltage transformer. However, in case of a failure in U4 voltage
transformer, the displacement voltage protection based on measured value
3V0 would be blocked.

1.2.2
96

Protection description

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

The displacement voltage protection is used to detect ground faults and to


determine direction of earth faults. More information about direction
determination based on displacement voltage is presented in other
subsections. Two definite stages included in this protection for detection of
earth faults. Each stage can be set to issue an alarm signal or a trip command.
This can be achieved by binary settings 3V01 Trip/3V01 Alarm and 3V02
Trip/3V02 Alarm. For example, by applying settings 3V01 Alarm and 3V02
Trip, the first stage would operate as an alarming stage, whereas the second
one would operate as tripping stage. If each stage is set to alarm, respective
output would be marshaled to ALARM contact. In contrast, by applying
setting trip to a stage, the trip output can be configured to various trip outputs
with the trip binary setting. It should be noted that the protection function
which is marshaled to BO1 would initiate CBF function. Generally, stage 1 is
applied to monitor light earth faults and usually used as the alarm stage.
However, stage 2 is applied to detect severe earth fault and therefore is used
as the trip stage.
Individual pickup value for each definite stage can be defined by setting
U_3V01 and U_3V02. With these settings, the measured or calculated
displacement voltage is compared separately with the setting value for each
stage. If the respective value is exceeded, a trip or alarm time delay timer is
started. Each timer is set to count up to a user-defined time delay. The time
delay can be set for each definite stage individually via settings T_3V01 and
T_3V02. After the user-defined time delays elapsed, a trip command or an
alarm signal is issued by respective stage.
Furthermore, it is possible to determine the faulty phase after expiration of
time delay for the first stage. A precondition is that three phase to ground
voltages should be connected to the IED in a grounded wye configuration. By
doing so, the individual phase to ground voltages is measured and is
compared with settings U_Phase low and U_Phase up. In this context, if
the measured phase to ground voltage in a single phase falls below the
threshold U_Phase low and at the same time the magnitude of the phase
voltages in the remained phases are above the setting value U_Phase up,
an earth fault is recognized at the phase having voltage magnitude below
U_Phase low threshold.

1.2.3

Logic diagram

97

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

BLK
3V0

3V0 1
OP
Func_3V01

T1

AND

3U0>

Trip/Alarm

Func_3V02

AND

3U0>>

T2

Trip/Alarm

Figure 30 Logic diagram for displacement voltage protection

3V0 1 OP
VA >

AND

Gnd A

AND

Gnd B

AND

Gnd C

VA <
VB >
VB <
VC >
VC <

Figure 31 Logic diagram for fault phase determination

1.3

Input and output signals


UP1
UP2
UP3
UP4

3V01_Trip
3V02_Trip
3V01 Alarm
3V02 Alarm

Table 67 Analog input list

98

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Signal

Description

UP1

Signal for voltage input 1

UP2

Signal for voltage input 2

UP3

Signal for voltage input 3

UP4

Signal for voltage input 4


Table 68 Binary output list

Signal

Description
Displacement voltage protection stage 1

3V01 Alarm

alarm
Displacement voltage protection stage 2

3V02 Alarm

alarm

3V01_Trip

Displacement voltage protection stage 1 trip

3V02_Trip

Displacement voltage protection stage 2 trip

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 69 Function setting list for displacement voltage protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

Unit

Min.

Max.

2.00

100.0

0.00

60.00

2.00

100.0

0.00

60.00

10.00

100.0

10.00

100.0

The voltage setting for


1.

20

U_3V01

displacement voltage protection


stage 1
The time setting for

2.

T_3V01

displacement voltage protection


stage 1
The voltage setting for

3.

30

U_3V02

displacement voltage protection


stage 2
The time setting for

4.

0.5

T_3V02

displacement voltage protection


stage 2

5.

20

U_Phase low

Low voltage setting for fault


phase determination
High voltage setting for

6.

45

U_Phase up

remained phase when fault


occurs

99

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Table 70 Logical linker list for displacement voltage protection


NO.

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

Func_3V01

Enable or disable the displacement voltage stage 1

2.

Func_3V02

Enable or enable the displacement voltage stage 2

Table 71 Binary setting list for displacement voltage protection


0

Bit

Explanation
Selection the measured voltage

KG2.8

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

or calculated voltage for


displacement voltage protection
Selection the stage 1 of

KG4.9

3V01 Alarm

3V01 Trip

displacement voltage protection


to alarm or trip
Selection the stage 2 of

KG4.10

3V02 Alarm

3V02 Trip

displacement voltage protection


to alarm or trip

1.5

IED reports
Table 72 Event information list

Information

Description

3V01 Trip

Voltage displacement protection stage 1 issues trip signal

3V02 Trip

Voltage displacement protection stage 2 issues trip signal


Table 73 Alarm information list

Information

Description

3V01 Alarm

Voltage displacement protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

3V02 Alarm

Voltage displacement protection stage 2 issues an alarm signal

PhA Grounded

Phase A is grounded

PhB Grounded

Phase B is grounded

PhC Grounded

Phase C is grounded

1.6

Technical data
Table 74 Technical data for displacement voltage protection

Item

100

Rang or Value

Tolerance

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Pickup threshold 3V0

2 to 100 V, step 1 V

5 % setting value or 1 V

0.00 to 60.00 s, step 0.01s

1 % setting or +50 ms, at

(calculated)
Time delay

120% operating setting


Reset ratio

Approx. 0.95

101

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

102

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure


protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
included in circuit breaker failure protection.

103

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

Circuit breaker failure protection

1.1

Introduction
The circuit breaker failure protection is able to detect a failure of the circuit
breaker during a fault clearance. It ensures fast back-up tripping of
surrounding breakers by tripping relevant bus sections.
Once a circuit breaker operating failure occurs on a feeder/transformer, the
bus section which the feeder/transformer is connected with can be selectively
isolated by the protection. In addition a transfer trip signal is issued to trip the
remote end circuit breaker of the feeder.
In the event of a circuit breaker failure with a busbar fault, a transfer trip signal
is issued to trip the remote end circuit breaker of the feeder.
The current criteria are in combination with three phase currents, zero and
negative sequence current to achieve a higher security.
The function can be set to give three phase re-trip of the own breaker to avoid
unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect starting due to
mistakes during testing.

Two trip stages (local CB and surrounding breaker tripping)

Transfer trip command to the remote line end in second stage

Internal/ external initiation

Three phase CBF initiation for sub-transmission system and distribution


system

Settable CB Aux contacts checking

Current criteria checking (including phase current, zero and negative


sequence current)

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Protection description
Circuit breaker failure protection can be enabled or disabled in the IED via
binary setting Func_CBF. If setting ON is applied, CBF protection would
be enabled. In this case, by operation of a protection function, and
subsequent CBF initiation by respective protection function, a programmed
timer runs toward a preset time delay limit. This time delay is set by user

104

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

under the settings T_CBF1. If the circuit breaker has not been opened after
expiration of the preset time limit, the circuit breaker failure protection issues
a command to trip circuit breaker (e.g. via a second trip coil). If the circuit
breaker doesnt respond to the repeated trip command, until another preset
delay time which is set at T_CBF2, the protection issues a trip command to
isolate the fault by tripping other surrounding backup circuit breakers (e.g. the
other CBs connected to the same bus section as the faulty CB).
Initiation of CBF protection can be performed by both the internal and external
protection functions. If it is desired to initiate the CBF protection by means of
external protection functions, specified binary inputs (BI) should be
marshaled. Internal protection functions can initiate the CBF protection
integrated in the IED.
There are two criteria for breaker failure detection: the first one is to check
whether the actual current flow effectively disappeared after a tripping
command had been issued. The second one is to evaluate the circuit breaker
auxiliary contact status.

1.2.2

Current criterion evaluation


Since circuit breaker is supposed to be open when current disappears from
the circuit, the first criterion (current monitoring) is the most reliable way for
IED to be informed about proper operation of circuit breaker. Therefore,
current monitoring is applied to detect circuit breaker failure condition. In this
context, the monitored current of each phase is compared with the
pre-defined setting. Furthermore, it is possible to implement current checking
in case of zero-sequence (
) and negative-sequence currents
2
(3I2=IA+a IB+aIC) via binary setting. If the zero-sequence and
negative-sequence currents checking are enabled, zero sequence and
negative-sequence current is compared separately with the corresponding
threshold.

1.2.3

Circuit breaker auxiliary contact evaluation


For protection functions where the tripping criterion is not dependent on
current, current flow is not a suitable criterion for proper operation of the
breaker. In this case, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact
should be used to determine if the circuit breaker properly operated. It is
possible to evaluate the circuit breaker operation from its auxiliary contact
status. A precondition for evaluating circuit breaker auxiliary contact is that
open status of CB should be marshaled to binary inputs.
105

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

In addition, it should be noted that evaluation of circuit breaker auxiliary


contacts is performed in CBF function only when the current flow monitoring
has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has picked up during the
running time of CBF timers, the circuit breaker is assumed to be open as soon
as the current disappears, even if the associated auxiliary contacts dont
indicate that the circuit breaker has opened.

1.2.4

Logic diagram

Ia>
OR

Ib>

CBF Chk I0/2 Off

OR

Ic>
3I0>

AND
OR

3I2>
AND
OR
CBF Chk I0/2 On

AND

AND

Figure 32 Logic diagram for current criterion


3Ph CB Open
AND

3Ph CB Open

CBF INIT

CB is closed

AND

Curr. crit.
OR

Figure 33 Logic diagram for circuit breaker evaluation criterion

106

Curr. Crit.

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

CB is closed
CBF Chk CB On

OR

Curr. crit.

AND

Func_CBF

T1

CBF1

T2

CBF2

CBF INIT

Figure 34 Logic diagram for circuit breaker failure protection

1.3

Input and output signals


IP1
IP2
IP3
IN
CBF Init

CBF1 Trip
CBF2 Trip

3Ph CB Open
3Ph CB Close

Table 75 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3

IN

signal for zero sequence current input


Table 76 Binary input list

Signal

Description

CBF Init

CBF initiation

3Ph CB Open

Three Phase CB open

3Ph CB Close

Three phase CB close


Table 77 Binary output list

Signal

Description

CBF1 Trip

Circuit breaker failure protection stage 1 trip

CBF2 Trip

Circuit breaker failure protection stage 2 trip

107

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 78 Function setting list for circuit breaker failure protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

In

I_CBF

2.

In

3I0_CBF

3.

In

3I2_CBF

4.

T_CBF1

5.

0.2

T_CBF2

Explanation
Phase current setting for CBF
protection
Zero-sequence current setting
for CBF protection
Negative-sequence current
setting for CBF protection
Delay time for stage 1 of CBF
protection
Delay time for stage 2 of CBF
protection

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.05In

20.00In

0.05In

20.00In

0.05In

20.00In

0.00

60.00

0.10

60.00

Table 79 Logical linker list for circuit breaker failure protection


NO.

Abbr.

1.

Func_CBF

Explanation

Enable or disable the circuit breaker failure protection

Table 80 Binary setting list for circuit breaker failure protection


Bit

2.7

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

Explanation
3U0 is measured or calculated
Enable or disable the function for

3.6

CBF Chk I0/2 Off

CBF Chk I0/2 On

checking zero or negative


sequence current

3.7

1.5

CBF Chk CB Off

CBF Chk CB On

Enable or disable the function for


checking CB status

IED reports
Table 81 Event information list

Information

Description

CBF1 Trip

The first stage CBF issues trip command

CBF2 Trip

The second stage CBF issues trip command

108

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

Information

Description

CBF Initiate

CBF function is initiated

1.6

Technical data
Table 82 Technical data for circuit breaker failure protection

Item

Rang or Value

Tolerance

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3% setting or 0.02Ir

Time delay of stage 1

0.00s to 32.00 s, step 0.01s

1% setting or +25 ms, at

Time delay of stage 2

0.00s to 32.00 s, step 0.01s

200% operating setting

Reset ratio

>0.95

Reset time of stage 1

< 20ms

phase current
Negative sequence current
zero sequence current

109

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

110

Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
included in circuit breaker failure protection.

111

Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

Dead zone protection

1.1

Introduction
The IED provides this protection function to protect the area between circuit
breaker and CT in the case that CB is open, namely dead zone. Therefore, by
occurrence of a fault in dead zone, the short circuit current is measured by
protection IED while CB auxiliary contacts indicate the CB is open.

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Function description
The protection can be enabled or disabled using dedicated binary setting. If
the protection function is enabled, by operation of a protection function, and
subsequent CBF initiation by respective protection function, a programmed
timer runs toward a preset time delay limit. This time delay is set by user in
the setting T_Dead Zone. If the fault current has not been disappeared after
expiration of the preset time limit even now the circuit breaker has been
opened, the dead zone protection would issue a trip command to isolate the
fault by tripping other surrounding backup circuit breakers (e.g. the other CBs
connected to the same bus section as the faulty CB).
When one bus side CT of feeder is applied, once a fault occurs in the dead
zone, the IED trips the relevant busbar zone. Tripping logic is illustrated in
Figure 35.

112

Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

trip

Bus

IFAULT

Line1

Line2

LineN

Legend:
Opened CB
Closed CB

Figure 35 Tripping logic when applying bus side CT

When one line side CT is applied, when a fault occurs in the dead zone,
protection relay sends a transfer trip to remote end relay to isolate the fault.
Tripping logic is illustrated in Figure 36.

113

Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

Inter trip

Busbar

IFAULT

Line1

Line2

Trip

LineN

Relay

Legend:
Opened CB
Closed CB

Figure 36 Tripping logic when applying line side CT

1.2.2

Logic diagram

CBF INIT
Curr. Crit.

Func_DZ

AND

3Ph CB Open
3Ph CB Close

Figure 37 Logic diagram for dead zone protection

1.3

114

Input and output signals

DZ

Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

Dead Zone Trip


IP1
IP2
IP3
CBF Init
3Ph CB Open
3Ph CB Close

Table 83 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3


Table 84 Binary input list

Signal

Description

CBF Init

CBF initiation

3Ph CB Open

Three phase CB open

3Ph CB Close

Three phase CB Close


Table 85 Binary output list

Signal

Description

DeadZone_Trip

Dead Zone protection trip

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 86 Function setting list for dead zone protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

0.2

T_Dead Zone

2.

In

I_CBF

Explanation

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.00

60

0.05In

20In

Time delay for dead zone


protection
Phase current setting for CBF
protection

Table 87 Logical linker list for dead zone protection

115

Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

NO.

Default

1.

On

1.5

Abbr.

Explanation

Enable or disable the dead zone protection

Func_DZ

IED reports
Table 88 Event information list

Information

Description

Dead Zone Trip

The dead zone function issues trip command

1.6

Technical data
Table 89 Technical data for dead zone protection

Item

Rang or Value

Tolerance

Current

0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir

3% setting or 0.02Ir

Time delay

0.00s to 32.00s, step 0.01s

1% setting or +40 ms, at


200% operating setting

Reset ratio

116

>0.95

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


energizing check function

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used synchro-check and energizing check function.

117

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function

Synchro-check and energizing check


function

1.1

Introduction
The synchronism and voltage check function ensures that the stability of the
network is not endangered when switching a line onto a busbar. The voltage
of the feeder to be energized is compared to that of the busbar to check
conformances in terms of magnitude, phase angle and frequency within
certain tolerances.
The synchro-check function checks whether the voltages on both sides of the
circuit breaker are synchronizing, or at least one side is dead to ensure
closing can be done safely.
When comparing the two voltages, the synchro check uses the voltages from
busbar and outgoing feeder. If the voltage transformers for the protective
functions are connected to the outgoing feeder side, the reference voltage
has to be connected to a busbar voltage.
If the voltage transformers for the protective functions are connected to the
busbar side, the reference voltage has to be connected to a feeder voltage.

1.2

Function principle
The synchronization function can either work together with automatic
reclosing function or with manual closure or in both cases. Thus,
synchronization check can be requested in two following ways:

Internal or external automatic reclosing request

Manual closing request

The external automatic reclosing and manual closing are initiated through
corresponding binary input respectively. When a synchronization request is
received to the function, it can work based on different close permission
criteria. The criteria can be selected for auto reclosure or manual closure
separately. The binary settings are AR_Override,AR_Syn
check,AR_EnergChkDLLB,AR_EnergChkLLDB, AR_EnergChkDLDB
for auto reclosure, and MC_Override, MC_Syn check,
MC_EnergChkDLLB, MC_EnergChkLLDB, MC_EnergChkDLDB are
118

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function
settable for manual closure. The meaning of each operation mode is as
follows:

Syn check: by applying this setting, with any synchronization request, the
synchronization condition is checked continuously.

Override: by applying this setting, with any synchronization request, the


synchronizing OK condition is released.

EnergChkDLLB: by applying this setting, with any synchronization


request, the dead line and live bus conditions are checked.

EnergChkLLDB: by applying this setting, with any synchronization


request, the live line and dead bus conditions are checked.

EnergChkDLDB: by applying this setting, with any synchronization


request, the dead line and dead bus conditions are checked.

Synchronization check can operate based on different voltage input


configurations. Reference voltage U4 can be phase to phase or phase to
earth voltage. Accordingly, the setting Phase_UL should be set as phase to
phase or phase to earth voltage, respectively. Both the setting and voltage
connection must be consistent. Pay attention to the single phase voltage
connection of Va, Vb, Vc, phase A or phase B should be connected in order to
get accurate frequency. Table 90 shows the assignment of the settable
values for phase determination.
Table 90 Setting for phase determination
Phase
A
B
C
AB
BC
CA

1.2.1

Setting ValuePhase_UL
1
2
3
4
5
6

Synchro-check mode
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference
values are measured in the IED and are available for the synchro-check
function for evaluation.
By any synchronization request, the synchronization conditions will be
119

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function
checked continuously. If the line voltages and busbar voltages are larger than
the value of Umin_Syn and meet the synchronization conditions,
synchronized reclosure can be performed.
At the end of the dead time, synchronization request will be initiated and the
synchronization conditions are continuously checked to be met for a certain
time during maximal extended time T_MaxSynExt. By satisfying
synch-check condition in this period, the monitor timer will stop and close
command will be issued for AR.
If the synchronization checking close permission criterion is used for manual
closure, the corresponding binary input should be active. When the binary
input is activated, a monitoring time T_MaxSynReq is started. This time is
considered for synchronizing process. During time period of T_MaxSynReq,
whenever synchronization condition is continuously met for T_Syn Chk, the
monitoring time would be stopped, and the output for manual close Syn OK
is energized. Syn OK output would be held if following conditions are met:

Synchronization conditions are met

Binary input for manual closure is energized

Monitoring time T_MaxSynReq does not elapse

Before releasing a close command at synchronization conditions, all of the


following conditions should be satisfied:

1.2.2
120

All three phases voltage U(a,b,c) should be above the setting value
Umin_Syn.

The reference voltage U4 should be above the setting value Umin_Syn.

The voltage difference should be within the permissible deviation U_Syn


Diff

The angle difference should be within the permissible deviation


Angle_Syn Diff

The frequency difference should be within the permissible deviation


Freq_Syn Diff

Energizing check mode

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function
In this mode of operation, the low voltage (dead) condition is checked
continuously whenever synchronization check is requested. If the line
voltages are less than Umax_Energ, reclosure can be performed. If the line
voltages and busbar voltages are all larger than Umin_Syn, the check mode
will automatically turn to full synchronization check mode.
In auto-recloser procedure, synchronization check request is triggered at the
end of the dead time. If the low voltage conditions are continuously met for a
certain numbers and during maximum extended time T_MaxSynExt, the
monitor timer will stop and close command will be issued for AR.
Before releasing a close command in low voltage conditions, one of the
following conditions need to be checked according to requirement:

1.2.3

Energizing check for dead line and live bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word AR_EnergChkDLLB is on

Energizing check for live line and live bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word AR_EnergChkLLDB is on

Energizing check for dead line and dead bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word AR_EnergChkDLDB is on

Override mode
In this mode, a synchronizing OK signal would be released whenever a
synchronization check request is received from autoreclosure or a manual
closure.

1.2.4

Logic diagram

121

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function
Ua(Ub,Uc) >Umin_Syn
U4>Umin_Syn
Anglediff<Angle_Syn Diff

AND

AND

T_Syn Check

Synchr-check
meet

Freqdiff<Freq_Syn Diff
Udiff<U_Syn Diff
AR_EnergChkDLLB on

T_MaxSynExt

U4 <Umax_Energ
Ua(Ub,Uc) >Umin_Syn

AND

VT_Line off
AR_EnergChkLLDB on
U4>Umin_Syn

AND

Ua(Ub,Uc)
<Umax_Energ

OR

Energizing check meet

VT_Line off
AR_EnergChkDLDB on
U4<Umax_Energ

AND

Ua(Ub,Uc)
<Umax_Energ

AR_EnergChkDLLB on
U4 >Umin_Syn
Ua(Ub,Uc)
<Umax_Energ

AND

VT_Line on
AR_EnergChkLLDB on
U4<Umax_Energ
Ua(Ub,Uc)
>Umin_Syn

AND

VT_Line on

Figure 38 Logic diagram for synchro-check function

1.3

122

Input and output signals

Synchr-check fail

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function
UP1
UP2
UP3
UP4
BI3/Init AR
BI5/Syn Req

Table 91 Analog input list


Signal

Description

UP1

Signal for voltage input 1

UP2

Signal for voltage input 2

UP3

Signal for voltage input 3

UP4

Signal for voltage input 4


Table 92 Binary input list

Signal

Description

BI3/Init AR

Binary input 3/Initiation autoreclosing

BI5/Syn Req

Binary input 5/Synchronization request

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 93 Function setting list for synchro-check and energizing check function

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

500

T_Syn Chk

2.

0.1

T_MaxSynExt

3.

0.1

T_MaxSynReq

4.

Phase_UL

Explanation
Time for synchro-check
function
Maximum time for extending
synchronization check
Maximum time for
synchronization check

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

1.00

6.00

Degree

1.00

80.00

1.00

40.00

Phase determination setting


Angle difference for

5.

10

Angle_Syn Diff

6.

U_Syn Diff

synchro-check function
Voltage difference for
synchro-check function

123

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function
NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

7.

0.02

Freq_Syn Diff

8.

43

Umin_Syn

9.

17

Umax_Energ

Frequency difference for


synchro-check function
Minimum voltage for
synchronization check
Maximum voltage for
Energizing check

Unit

Min.

Max.

HZ

0.02

2.00

60.00

130.0

20.00

100.0

Table 94 Logical linker list for synchro-check and energizing check protection
NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

On

Func_AR

Enable or disable the synchronization check function

2.

On

Func_MC

Enable or disable the synchronization check function

Table 95 Binary setting list for synchro-check and energizing check protection
Bit

Default

3.8

Explanation
Synchrozination check mode
Energizing for DLLB check
mode

3.9

Selection of AR check mode

Energizing for LLDB check


mode
Energizing for DLDB check

3.10

mode

Override mode
Synchrozination check mode

3.11

Energizing for DLLB check


mode

3.12

Selection of MC check mode

Energizing for LLDB check


mode
Energizing for DLDB check

3.13

mode

Override mode

1.5

IED reports
Table 96 Event information list

Information

Description

Syn Ok

Synchronization check OK

Syn Request

Check synchronization

124

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function
Information

Description

Syn Vdiff fail

Voltage difference for synchronization check fail

Syn Ang fail

Angle difference for synchronization check fail

Syn Fdiff fail

Frequency difference for synchronization check fail

Syn Failure

Synchronization check timeout

1.6

Technical data
Table 97 Technical data for synchro-check and energizing check function
Item

Rang or Value

Tolerance

Synchronization check:

Operating mode

Synch-check

Energizing check, and


synch-check if energizing
check failure

Override

Energizing check:

Dead V4 and dead V3Ph

Dead V4 and live V3Ph

Live V4 and dead V3Ph

Voltage threshold of dead line or

10 to 50 V (phase to earth), step

bus

1V

Voltage threshold of live line or

30 to 65 V (phase to earth), step

bus

1V

V-measurement

Voltage

difference
f-measurement

1 to 40 V (phase-to-earth), steps

3 % setting or 1 V

3 % setting or 1 V

1V

1V
(f2>f1; f2<f1)

-measurement (2>1;

0.02 to 2.00 Hz, step, 0.01 Hz,

20 mHz

1 to 80 , step, 1

0.05 to 60.00 s, step,0.01 s,

1.5 % setting value or +60

2<1)
Minimum measuring time

ms
Maximum synch-check

0.05 to 60.00 s, step,0.01 s,

1 % setting value or +50 ms

extension time

125

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


Energizing check function

126

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

Chapter 15 Autoreclosing function

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for automatic reclosure function.

127

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

Autoreclosing function

1.1

Introduction
For restoration of the normal service after a transient fault an autoreclosing
attempt is mostly made for overhead lines. Experiences show that about 85%
of faults have transient nature and will disappear after an auto reclosing
attempt is performed. This means that the line can be re-energized in a short
period. The reconnection is accomplished after a dead time via the automatic
reclosing function. If the fault is permanent or short circuit arc has not
disappeared, the protection will re-trip the breaker. Main features of the
autoreclosing are as follows:

1.2

4 shots automatic recloser (selectable)

Individually settable dead time for each shot

Internal/external AR initiation

Three phase AR operation

CB ready supervision

CB Aux. contact supervision

Cooperation with internal synch-check function for reclosing command

Function principle
Three-pole multi-shot auto-recloser (AR) function is provided with selectable
number of shots from 1 to 4. This function can be enabled or disabled by
binary setting. In addition, it is possible to enable or disable AR function by
binary input BI1/AR Off. In this context, if binary input BI1/AR Off is active,
AR function would be disabled, even though the internal setting which is
applied at Func_AR. The priority for enable or disable the function with
binary input BI1/AR Off is higher than binary setting Func_AR. The
integrated AR function can be enabled, only when binary input BI1/AR Off is
inactive and at the same time binary setting Func_AR is set to ON.

1.2.1

Auto-reclosing initiation modules


Initiation of AR function can be performed by internal protection functions or
via external binary input BI3/Init AR. Regarding the internal protection
functions, it is possible to perform reclosing attempt in conjunction with

128

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

protection functions illustrated in Table 98.


Table 98 Protection functions for initiation AR

Protection Function

Overcurrent protection

Earth fault protection

Sensitive earth fault protection

Negative sequence protection

Protection stage

Binary setting

Definite time stage 1

OC1 Init AR

Definite time stage 2

OC2 Init AR

Inverse time stage

OC Inv Init AR

Definite time stage 1

EF1 Init AR

Definite time stage 2

EF2 Init AR

Inverse time stage

EF Inv Init AR

Definite time stage 1

SEF1 Init AR

Definite time stage 2

SEF2 Init AR

Inverse time stage

SEF Inv Init AR

Definite time stage 1

NSOC1 Init AR

Definite time stage 2

NSOC2 Init AR

Inverse time stage

NSOC Inv Init AR

In the table, the first and second columns show the protection functions,
respectively, while the third column introduces the binary setting which is
possible to set protection functions to work in conjunction with AR.
Furthermore, it is possible to program AR to operate for three-phase faults.
This can be achieved by applying setting 3P Fault Init AR/3P Fault Blk AR.
By this setting, autoreclosing would be possible in case of three-phase faults,
in addition to single-phase fault. However, if it is not desired to reclose in case
of three-phase faults, the IED should be set via setting 3P Fault Blk AR.

1.2.2

Autoreclosing logic
To prevent automatic reclosing during feeder dead status (circuit breaker (CB)
open), for example, by relay testing, AR is initiated at first shot only when the
CB has been closed for more than a time period defined by T_AR Reset.
Subsequent to initiation of AR, the dead time do not start until the IED is
informed about open status of CB through binary input. The delay of dead
time can be extended up to time setting T_Max. CB Open. During this time,
whenever CB open status is recognized by the IED, dead time is started. If
129

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

monitoring time T_Max. CB Open elapses and CB open status is not still
detected by the IED, AR function would be blocked for duration of AR reset
time which is defined by T_AR Reset. In this case, reclosing attempt would
be announced as unsuccessful (annunciation AR Failure).
If circuit breaker failure protection (internal or external) is used for the CB,
monitoring time T_Max CB Open should be set shorter than the delay time
for detection of circuit breaker failure. By doing so, make sure that no
reclosing takes place for a faulty circuit breaker. No reclosing would take
place for CBF stage 2 or dead zone function operation.
As mentioned previously, if CB open position is detected by the IED during
monitoring time T_Max. CB Open, dead time is started and would last for
pre-defined time T_3P AR1 in case of the first reclosing shot (respective
dead times for other reclosing shots are set by T_3P AR2, T_3P AR3 and
T_3P AR4, for second, third and forth shots, respectively). After dead time
expiration, a monitoring time T_MaxSynExt is started. In fact, dead time can
be extended by T_MaxSynExt. This time is considered for synchronizing
process. In this context, at the end of dead time, IED starts to check
synchronization condition. During monitoring time period T_MaxSynExt,
whenever synchronization condition is continuously met for T_Syn Chk, the
monitoring time would be stopped, AR close command will be issued to close
circuit breaker. However, at the end of monitoring time T_MaxSynExt, if
synchronization condition is not still met continuously for T_Syn Chk, AR
function would be blocked for a time period defined by T_AR Reset.
Furthermore, reclosing attempt would be announced as unsuccessful
(annunciation AR Failure).
Regarding the close command, it has a pulse nature which lasts for 500ms at
most. As expected, no synchronization check takes place during this pulse
time. If during this pulse time, the auxiliary contact of CB indicates that the CB
has been closed or a current flow is detected by the IED, the close command
pulse will be reset.
Once the close command pulse is issued (rising edge) to close the circuit
breaker, reclaim time T_Reclaim is started, within this time it is checked
whether the reclosing attempt is successful. If no fault occurs before the
reclaim time elapses, it is thought that fault is cleared. In this case, at the end
of reclaim time, reset time T_AR Reset is started. During reset time AR
function is blocked. If a new fault occurs before the reclaim time elapses, it
results in reset of the reclaim time and starting of next reclosing shot. This
procedure can be repeated until the maximum number of reclosure shots is
reached.

130

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

If none of the reclosing shots is successful, and therefore the fault is still
remained after the last shot, final trip takes place. Furthermore, AR function
would be blocked for a time period defined by T_AR Reset, and
annunciation AR Failure is issued.
It is possible to block AR function for a specified time after any manual closing
command. This can be achieved by marshaling CB close command to binary
input BI4/MC CLS. When the binary input is activated, the IED is informed
about execution of a manual closing. As a result, AR function would be
blocked for T_AR Reset.
Furthermore, AR function would be blocked if the IED detects an abnormal
condition in CB control circuit. This means that if both binary inputs 3Ph CB
Open and 3Ph CB Close are active or inactivate at the same time, AR
function is blocked until the abnormal condition disappears.
There may be cases when it is already obvious that CB cannot perform any
reclosing attempt. For such cases, binary input BI2/CB Faulty is considered
which indicates that CB is not ready for reclosing. CB Faulty should be
checked with a time delay T_CB Faulty, which is set according to the
characteristic of circuit breaker. AR function would be blocked if the IED
detects activation of BI2/CB Faulty, even the AR function would not be
initiated. AR is blocked until the BI disappears. Furthermore, this condition is
checked whenever a close command is received from AR function.
Single-shot reclosure
When an internal or external trip command initiates AR function, the reclosing
program is being executed. First of all, CB auxiliary contact is checked to be
open until expiration of monitoring time T_Max. CB Open. If during this time,
CB open status is recognized, dead time is started. When dead time interval
T_3P AR1 has elapsed, monitoring time T_MaxSynExt is started. During
this period, whenever synchronization condition is continuously met for
T_Syn Chk, a closing pulse signal is issued. At the same time, reclaim time
T_Reclaim is started. If a new fault occurs before the reclaim time elapses,
AR function is blocked causing final tripping of CB. However, if no fault occurs
before reclaim time expires, AR is reset and therefore is ready for future
reclosing attempt for the next fault.
Multi-shot reclosure
In this condition, the first reclosing shot, in principle, is same as the
single-shot auto reclosing. If the first reclosing is unsuccessful, it doesnt
result in a final trip. Therefore if a fault occurs during reclaim time of the first
131

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

reclosing shot; it would result in the starting of next reclosing shot with
different dead time. This procedure can be repeated until the whole reclosing
shots which are set inside the IED is performed. Different dead times can be
set for various shots of AR function. This can be performed through settings
T_3P AR1, T_3P AR2, T_3P AR3 and T_3P AR4. If one of the preset
reclosure shots is successful, AR function would be reset after expiration of
the reclaim time. However, if none of reclosing shots is successful, i.e. the
fault doesnt disappear after the last programmed shot, a final trip is issued,
and reclosing attempts are announced to be unsuccessful. Figure 39
illustrates the operation method of two shots reclosure.

Trip Command

CB Open

AR Initiate
Dead time 1

Dead time 2

Close Command

Reclaim time

< Reclaim time

Reclaim time

Figure 39 Timing diagram showing two reclosure shots, first unsuccessful, second
successful

1.3

132

Input and output signals

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

IP1

AR Close

IP2

AR Not Ready
AR Final Trip

IP3
UP1

AR Successful

UP2

AR Fail

UP3
UP4
BI1/AR Off
BI2/CB Faulty
BI3/Init AR
BI4/MC CLS
BI8 CB Open
BI9 CB Close

Table 99 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3

UP1

signal for voltage input 1

UP2

signal for voltage input 2

UP3

signal for voltage input 3

UP4

signal for voltage input 4


Table 100 Binary input list

Signal

Description

BI1/AR Off

Binary input 1/AR function off

BI2/CB Faulty

Binary input 2/CB Faulty

BI3/Init AR

Binary input 3/Initiation AR function

BI4/MC CLS

Binary input 4/manual closing

MC/AR Block

AR block

BI8 CB Open

Binary input 8 CB Open

BI9 CB Close

Binary input 9 CB Close


Table 101 Binary output list

Signal

Description

AR Close

AR Close

AR Not Ready

AR Not Ready

AR Final Trip

AR Final Trip

AR Successful

AR Successful

133

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

AR Fail

AR Fail

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 102 Function setting list for auto-reclosing function

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

1.00

4.00

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

0.05

60.00

1.00

6.00

Degree

1.00

80.00

1.00

40.00

HZ

0.02

2.00

60.00

130.0

Time delay setting for shot 1


1.

0.5

T_3P AR1

dead time of three phase


autoreclosing
Time delay setting for shot 2

2.

0.5

T_3P AR2

dead time of three phase


autoreclosing
Time delay setting for shot 3

3.

0.5

T_3P AR3

dead time of three phase


autoreclosing
Time delay setting for shot 4

4.

0.5

T_3P AR4

dead time of three phase


autoreclosing

5.

Times_AR

6.

T_Reclaim

7.

T_AR Reset

8.

0.1

T_Max. CB Open

9.

500

T_Syn Chk

10.

0.1

T_MaxSynExt

11.

Phase_UL

12.

10

Angle_Syn Diff

13.

U_Syn Diff

14.

0.02

Freq_Syn Diff

15.

43

Umin_Syn

134

The number of autoreclosing


shots
Time setting for
autoreclosing reclaim time
Time setting for AR resting
Maximum time setting for CB
open
Time for synchro-check
function
Maximum time for extension
of synchronization check
Phase determination setting
for syncho-check reference
Angle difference for
synchro-check function
Voltage difference for
synchro-check function
Frequency difference for
synchro-check function
Minimum voltage for

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

Unit

Min.

Max.

20.00

100.0

0.10

60.00

synchronization check
16.

17

Umax_Energ

17.

10

T_CB Faulty

Maximum voltage for


Energizing check
Time setting for CB faulty

Table 103 Logical linker list for auto-reclosing function


NO.

Default

1.

On

Abbr.
Func_AR

Explanation

Enable or disable the auto-recloser function

Table 104 Binary setting list for auto-reclosing function


0

Bit

Default

Explanation

3.8

Synchrozination check mode

3.9

Energizing for DLLB check


mode

Selection of AR check mode


3.10

Energizing for LLDB check


mode
Energizing for DLDB check
mode
Override mode
Enable or disable the AR

5.0

OC1 Init AR

Off

function is initiated by stage 1


of overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.1

OC2 Init AR

Off

function is initiated by stage 2


of overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.2

OC Inv Init AR

Off

function is initiated by inverse


stage of overcurrent
protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.3

EF1 Init AR

Off

function is initiated by stage 1


of earth fault protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.4

EF2 Init AR

Off

function is initiated by stage 2


of earth fault protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.5

EF Inv Init AR

Off

function is initiated by inverse


stage of earth fault protection

5.6

SEF1 Init AR

Off

Enable or disable the AR


function is initiated by stage 1

135

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

Bit

Default

Explanation
of sensitive earth fault
protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.7

SEF2 Init AR

Off

function is initiated by stage 2


of sensitive earth fault
protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.8

SEF Inv Init AR

Off

function is initiated by inverse


stage of sensitive earth fault
protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.9

NSOC1 Init AR

Off

function is initiated by stage 1


of negative sequence
overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.10

NSOC2 Init AR

Off

function is initiated by stage 2


of negative sequence
overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.11

NSOC Inv Init AR

Off

function is initiated by inverse


stage of negative sequence
overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR

5.15

3P Fault Init AR

3P Fault Blk AR

function is initiated by single


phase fault or three phase
fault

1.5

IED reports
Table 105 Event information list

Information

Description

AR in progess

AR is initiated by internal or external function

Syn Request

Check synchronization

Syn OK

Synchronization check OK

1st Reclose

The first shot reclosing

2nd Reclose

The second shot reclosing

3rd Reclose

The third shot reclosing

4th Reclose

The fourth shot reclosing

AR Success

AR successful

AR Failure

AR unsuccessful

136

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

Information

Description

Syn Vdiff fail

Voltage difference for synchronization check fail

Syn Ang fail

Angle difference for synchronization check fail

Syn Fdiff fail

Frequency difference for synchronization check fail

Syn Failure

Synchronization check timeout


Table 106 Alarm information list

Information

Description

CB Not Ready

BI2 is active to show CB is not ready

1.6

Technical data
Table 107 Technical data for autoreclosing function

Item
Number of reclosing shots

Rang or Value

Tolerance

Up to 4
Shot 1 to 4 is individually
selectable

AR initiating functions

Internal protection functions


External binary input

Dead time, separated setting for

0.05 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s

1 % setting value or +50 ms

shots 1 to 4
Reclaim time

0.50 s to 60.00s, step 0.01 s

Blocking duration time (AR reset

0.05 s to 60.00s, step 0.01 s

time)
Circuit breaker ready supervision

0.50 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s

time
Dead time extension for

0.05 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s

synch-check (Max. SYNT EXT)

137

Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

138

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for unbalance protection function.

139

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

Unbalance protection

1.1

Introduction
The purpose of an unbalance detection scheme is to remove a capacitor bank
from the system in the event of a fuse operation. This will prevent damaging
overvoltages across the remaining capacitor units in the group where the fuse
operation occurs, to protect against the situation that can be immediately
harmful to the capacitor units or associated equipments.

1.2

Protection principle
Unbalance detection works scheme is set to issue an alarm signal for an
initial failure in a bank. If the critical failure happens, the capacitor bank would
be tripped from the line.
Unbalance detection based on unbalance current or unbalance voltage, This
IED provides three analog channels to monitor unbalance status. If only one
unbalance analog quantity input is provided, other two channels can be
reserved. In order to avoid mal-operating, auxiliary breaker contact is
necessary as a criterion.
Different detecting schemes are described in the following, which are applied
for the unbalance protection.

1.2.1

Unbalance protection detection for grounded capacitor


bank
A
B
C

I1

Figure 40 Example for grounded capacitor bank

140

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A grounded capacitor arrangement is shown here. The typical unbalance


protection scheme consists of a current transformer connected between
neutral point and ground.
It provides a relatively inexpensive protection scheme. But disadvantages are
included:

1.2.2

Sensitive to system unbalance

Don not operate when failure happen similarly in all the phases

Summation of intermediate tap-point voltage for


grounded-wye capacitor bank
A
B
C

U1

Figure 41 Example for grounded-wye capacitor bank

It shows a different unbalance protection scheme for a grounded wye


capacitor bank using capacitor tap point voltages. Any unbalance detected in
the capacitor units will cause an unbalance voltage at the tap points. The
resultant voltage in the open delta indicates the unbalance.

1.2.3

Neutral current differential protection for grounded


split-wye capacitor bank

141

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A
B
C

I1
Figure 42 Example for split-wye capacitor bank

In this scheme, the neutrals of the two banks are grounded through separate
current transformers. The secondary current transformed by the CT is
insensitive to any outside conditions and is affected by two capacitor banks.
There is no any indication for balance failure in this configuration.

1.2.4

Neutral voltage unbalance protection for unrounded wye


capacitor bank
A
B
C

U1

Figure 43 Example for unrounded-wye capacitor bank

Using a voltage transformer connected between the neutral point and ground,
any neutral voltage shift due to the failure of capacitor unit is detected. This
scheme is less sensitive to system unbalance.

1.2.5

142

Neutral voltage unbalance detection by 3PTs for


unrounded wye capacitor bank

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A
B
C

U1
Figure 44 Example for unrounded-wye capacitor bank with 3VTs

This protection scheme uses three lines to neutral VTs with the secondary
connected in the broken delta. It is less sensitive to system unbalance.

1.2.6

Neutral current protection for ungrounded split-wye


capacitor bank
A
B
C

Figure 45 Example for ungrounded split-wye capacitor bank with CT

In this protection scheme, a current transformer is used in the neutral circuit


to measure the unbalance current. It is not sensitive to system unbalance but
sensitive to detection of capacitor unit failure.

1.2.7

Neutral voltage protection for ungrounded split-wye


capacitor bank

143

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A
B
C

U1

Figure 46 Example for ungrounded split-wye capacitor bank with VT

In this protection scheme, a voltage transformer is used in the neutral circuit


to measure the unbalance voltage. It is not sensitive to system unbalance but
sensitive to detection of capacitor unit failure.

1.2.8

Neutral voltage unbalance detection for ungrounded


split-wye capacitor bank
A
B
C

U1

Figure 47 Example for ungrounded split-wye capacitor bank with neutral VT

This scheme is not sensitive to system unbalance but sensitive to detection of


capacitor unit failures.

1.2.9

144

Three unbalance voltages detection for capacitor bank

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A
B
C

U1
U2
U3

Figure 48 Example for three unbalance voltages detection

This scheme is applicable for either grounded or ungrounded capacitor bank,


it is not sensitive to system unbalance but sensitive to detection of capacitor
unit failure, fault occurrence in each capacitor unit can be detected reliably.

1.2.10

Three unbalance currents detection for capacitor bank


A
B
C

I1
I2
I3
Figure 49 Example for three unbalance currents detection

This scheme is applicable for either grounded or ungrounded capacitor bank,


it is not sensitive to system unbalance but sensitive to detection of capacitor
unit failure, fault occurrence in each capacitor unit can be detected reliably.

145

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

1.2.11

Logic diagram

Unbalance 1>
Unbalance 2>

OR

AND

Func_UBL

Talarm

Alarm
UBL Alarm On

Unbalance 3>
3Ph CB Open
Unbalance 1>
Unbalance 2>

OR

AND

Func_UBL

Ttrip

Unbalance 3>
3Ph CB Open

Figure 50 Logic diagram for unbalance protection

1.3

Input and output signals


IC1

UBL Alarm

IC2

UBL Trip

IC3
UC1
UC2
UC3
BI8 CB Open

Table 108 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IC1

signal for current input 1

IC2

signal for current input 2

IC3

signal for current input 3

UC1

signal for voltage input 1

UC2

signal for voltage input 2

UC3

signal for voltage input 3


Table 109 Binary input list

146

Trip

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

Signal

Description

BI8 CB Open

Binary input 8 CB Open


Table 110 Binary output list

Signal

Description

UBL Alarm

Unbalance protection alarm

UBL Trip

Unbalance protection trip

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 111 Function setting list for unbalance protection

NO.

Abbr.

1.

U_UBL Alarm

2.

I_UBL Alarm

3.

T_UBL Alarm

4.

U_UBL Trip

5.

I_UBL Trip

6.

T_UBL Trip

Explanation
Voltage setting for alarm of unbalance
protection
Current setting for alarm of unbalance
protection
Time setting for alarm of unbalance
protection
Voltage setting for tripping of unbalance
protection
Current setting for tripping of unbalance
protection
Time setting for tripping of unbalance
protection

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.50

100.0

0.10

20.0

0.10

60.00

0.50

100.0

0.10

20.0

0.00

60.00

Table 112 Logical linker list for thermal overload protection


NO.

Abbr.

1.

Func_UBL

Explanation

Enable or disable the unbalance protection

Table 113 Binary setting list for thermal overload protection


Bit

4.8

UBL Alarm Off

UBL Alarm On

1.5

Explanation
Enable or disable the alarm
function of unbalance protection

IED reports
147

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

Table 114 Event information list


Information

Description

UBL Trip

Unbalance protection issues trip command


Table 115 Alarm information list

Information

Description

UBL Alarm

Unbalance protection issues an alarm signal

148

Chapter 17 Under current protection

Chapter 17 Under current monitoring

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for under current monitoring function.

149

Chapter 17 Under current protection

Under current monitoring

1.1

Introduction
Under current protection is used to prevent reconnection of the charged
capacitor bank to energized network when a short loss of supply voltage
occurs.
Once under current protection operates, the CB closing circuit will be
interrupted and reset after a certain time. Additionally, time to resetting will be
displayed on the HMI.

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Function description
In order to inhibit reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live network,
reconnection inhibition function is provided. It should be activated when under
current protection operates. Output UC_BLOCK is issued and the inhibition
will last for T_Inhibition, this contact is used in series of close circuit to inhibit
reconnection by any reasons.
After timer T_Inhibition expiration, the closing inhibition will remove
automatically. Shortcut mode is provided in HMI to reset this timer and
remove closing inhibition in case of any emergency closing. Press QUIT and
SET at same time, inhibition is removed.

1.2.2

Logic diagram

Ia<
AND

Ib<

AND

Func_UC

Ic<
3Ph CB Open

Figure 51 Logic diagram for under current monitoring function

150

Trip

Chapter 17 Under current protection

1.3

Input and output signals


IP1

UC Trip

IP2
IP3
BI8 CB Open

Table 116 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3


Table 117 Binary input list

Signal

Description

BI8 CB Open

Binary input 8 CB Open


Table 118 Binary output list

Signal

Description

UC Trip

Under current monitoring function trip

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 119 Function setting list for under current monitoring function

NO.

Abbr.

1.

I_UC

2.

T_UC

3.

T_Inhibition

Explanation
Current setting for under current
protection
Time setting for tripping of under
current protection
Time setting for inhibition of under
current protection

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.50In

20.00In

0.10

60.00

30.00

6000.0

Table 120 Logical linker list for under current monitoring function

151

Chapter 17 Under current protection

NO.
1.

1.5

Abbr.

Explanation

Enable or disable the under current protection

Func_UC

IED reports
Table 121 Event information list

Information

Description

UC Trip

Under current protection issues trip command

Inhibit close

Drive a contact to inhibit reconnection of capacitor

152

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for load shedding function.

153

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Low frequency load shedding


protection

1.1

Introduction
The function monitors the network abnormality by detection of frequency
reduction. When the system frequency falls down to a threshold frequency
with following conditions satisfied, specified load will be removed.

Undervoltage checking

Rate of frequency (df/dt) checking

CB position checking

Load current checking

VT secondary circuit supervision

1.2

Protection principle

1.2.1

Function description
Low frequency load shedding is provided based on bay load shedding
principle. This means that the protection function is implemented in each bay
separately, instead of being applied in an incoming bay and sending trip
command to various outgoing bays. In this regard, coordination between the
low frequency load shedding protection functions applied at various bays can
be achieved by selecting appropriate settings for pickup threshold and time
delay of the protection in various bays. The protection function can be
enabled or disabled via binary setting Func_LF LS. Based on the bay load
shedding principle, only one trip stage is applied for the protection. This
protection can operate based on both three-phase and single-phase voltage
input configurations. The voltage connection is set in the IED by binary setting
3Ph V Connect/1Ph V Connect. It is noted that in case of single-phase to
earth voltage input configuration, the voltage should be connected to phase A
or B, which are necessary for frequency measurement. Similarly, for single
phase to phase voltage, the voltage connection input should be VA-B. In each
configuration, it derives the power frequency from the connected voltage. If
the frequency falls below a pre-defined threshold (setting F_LF LS), a timer

154

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

begins to run toward a pre-defined time limit which is the time delay of the
protection (setting T_LF LS). When the time delay elapsed, the trip
command is issued.
Since the protection based on power frequency from the connected voltages,
the protection should be blocked if some conditions are satisfied as following:

1.3

The minimum magnitude among of the connected voltages is lower than


the defined threshold in setting U_Chk. In case of single-phase voltage
connection, only the magnitude of the connected voltage is checked with
setting U_Chk

VT fail is detected by the IED or a MCB failure signal is received to the


IED through respective binary input

Load current is lower than setting I_Chk. This condition is mainly useful
when the voltage transformer is connected at source side. The setting
applied at I_Chk corresponds to minimum load current which may flow
when circuit breaker is closed. It is possible to disable this feature by
applying setting 0 to I_Chk

Circuit breaker is in open status. Similar to the previous condition, it is


useful when the voltage transformer is connected at source side. In this
case, it is not desired to issue any trip command by low frequency load
shedding even if the frequency falls below the pre-defined threshold

Rate of frequency change (f/t) exceeds the setting of frequency


change rate dF/dt_LS

Input and output signals


IP1

LF LS Trip

IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3
BI8 CB Open

Table 122 Analog input list


Signal

Description

155

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3

UP1

signal for voltage input 1

UP2

signal for voltage input 2

UP3

signal for voltage input 3


Table 123 Binary input list

Signal

Description

BI8 CB Open

Binary input 8 CB open


Table 124 Binary output list

Signal

Description

LF LS Trip

Low frequency load shedding trip

1.4

Setting parameter

1.4.1

Setting list
Table 125 Function setting list for low frequency load shedding protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

49.5

F_LF LS

2.

0.5

T_LF LS

3.

dF/dt_LS

4.

70

U_Chk

5.

0.2In

I_Chk

Explanation
Frequency setting for low frequency
load shedding protection
Time setting for low frequency load
shedding protection
dF/dt setting for low frequency load
shedding protection
Voltage checking setting for low
frequency load shedding protection
Current checking setting for low
frequency load shedding protection

Unit

Min.

Max.

HZ

45.00

60.00

0.05

60.00

HZ/S

1.00

10.00

10.00

120.0

2.00In

Table 126 Logical linker list for low frequency load shedding protection
NO.

Default

1.

On

156

Abbr.
Func_LF LS

Explanation

Enable or disable the low frequency load shedding


protection

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Table 127 Binary setting list for low frequency load shedding protection
Bit

Default

2.9

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

3.4

dF(dU)/dt Off

dF(dU)/dt On

1.5

Explanation
Single phase or three phase
voltage connection
Enable or disable the binary
setting of dF(dU)/dt

IED reports
Table 128 Event information list

Information

Description

LF LS Trip

Low frequency load shedding function issues trip command

157

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Low voltage load shedding protection

2.1

Introduction
This kind of load shedding is to prevent the voltage collapse and uncontrolled
loss of load.
Low voltage load shedding is necessary when the network is connected with
a huge system with vast power capacity. Under this condition, Low
Frequency Load Shedding Scheme cannot work properly. Low Voltage Load
Shedding Scheme" would be a useful criterion whenever Automatic Voltages
Regulator (AVR) is out of service or not equipped with following conditions
satisfied.

Undervoltage checking

Negative sequence voltage checking

Rate of voltage (du/dt) checking

CB position checking

Load current checking

VT secondary circuit supervision

2.2

Protection principle

2.2.1

Funciton description
Low voltage load shedding is provided based on bay load shedding principle.
This means that the protection function is implemented in each bay separately,
instead of being applied in an incoming bay and sending trip command to
various outgoing bays. In this regard, coordination between the low voltage
load shedding protection functions applied at various bays can be achieved
by selecting appropriate settings for pickup threshold and time delay of the
protection in various bays. The protection function can be enabled or disabled
via binary setting Func_LV LS. Based on the bay load shedding principle,
only one trip stage is provided for the protection. This protection can operate
based on both three-phase and single-phase voltage input configurations.
The voltage connection is set in the IED by binary setting 3Ph V

158

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Connect/1Ph V Connect. If all the measured voltages fall below a


pre-defined threshold (setting U_LV LS), a timer begins to run toward a
pre-defined limit which is the time delay of the protection (setting T_LV LS).
When the time delay elapsed, the trip command is issued. It is noted that the
setting applied at U_LV LS corresponds to phase to phase voltage.
Since the protection operates based on measured voltages, for some
conditions satisfied the protection should be blocked. These conditions are as
follows:

2.3

The minimum magnitude among of the connected voltages is lower than


the defined threshold U_Chk. In case of single-phase voltage
connection, only the magnitude of the connected voltage is checked with
setting U_Chk

VT fail is detected by the IED or a MCB failure signal is received to the


IED through respective binary input

Load current is lower than setting I_Chk. This condition is mainly useful
when the voltage transformer is connected at source side. The setting
applied at I_Chk corresponds to minimum load current which may flow
when circuit breaker is closed. It is possible to disable this feature by
applying setting 0 to I_Chk

Circuit breaker is in open status. Similar to the previous condition, it is


useful when the voltage transformer is connected at source side. In this
case, it is not desired to issue any trip command by low voltage load
shedding even if the voltage falls below the pre-defined threshold

Rate of voltage change (U/t) exceeds the setting of voltage change


rate dU/dt_LS. The setting corresponds to phase to phase voltage

Negative sequence voltage is greater than 5V. In case of single-phase


voltage connection (by setting 1Ph V Connect), this condition is
useless.

Input and output signals

159

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

LV LS Trip

IP1
IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3
BI8 CB Open

Table 129 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3

UP1

signal for voltage input 1

UP2

signal for voltage input 2

UP3

signal for voltage input 3


Table 130 Binary input list

Signal

Description

BI8 CB Open

Binary input 8 CB open


Table 131 Binary output list

Signal

Description

LF LS Trip

Low voltage load shedding trip

2.4

Setting parameter

2.4.1

Setting list
Table 132 Function setting list for low frequency load shedding protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

100

U_LV LS

2.

T_LV LS

3.

dU/dt_LS

160

Explanation
Voltage setting for low voltage load
shedding protection
Time setting for low voltage load
shedding protection
dF/dt setting for low voltage load

Unit

Min.

Max.

50.00

110.00

0.05

60.00

HZ/S

1.00

10.00

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

shedding protection
4.

70

U_Chk

5.

0.2In

I_Chk

Voltage checking setting for low


voltage load shedding protection
Current checking setting for low
voltage load shedding protection

10.00

120.0

2.00In

Table 133 Logical linker list for low frequency load shedding protection
NO.

Default

1.

On

Abbr.

Explanation

Enable or disable the low voltage load shedding


protection

Func_LV LS

Table 134 Binary setting list for low frequency load shedding protection
Bit

Default

2.9

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

3.4

dF(dU)/dt Off

dF(dU)/dt On

2.5

Explanation
Single phase or three phase
voltage connection
Enable or disable the binary
setting of dF(dU)/dt

IED reports
Table 135 Event information list

Information

Func_LV LS

Description

Disable or enable the low voltage load shedding

161

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Overload load shedding protection

3.1

Introduction
The IED provides a load shedding function based on the load current passing
through feeder. This function will be essential in conditions that feeder is
connected to a huge network with constant frequency and additional AVR is
continuously used for voltage regulation. In this case, load shedding
protection should be done based on load current and monitoring of following
items

Undervoltage checking

Rate of voltage (du/dt) checking (in the case of voltage connection)

Rate of frequency (df/dt) checking (in the case of voltage connection)

VT secondary circuit supervision (in the case of voltage connection)

3.2

Protection principle

3.2.1

Fucntion description
Overload load shedding is provided based on bay load shedding principle.
This means that the protection function is implemented in each bay separately,
instead of being applied in an incoming bay and sending trip command to
various outgoing bays. In this regard, coordination between the overload load
shedding protection functions applied at various bays can be achieved by
selecting appropriate settings for pickup threshold and time delay of the
protection in various bays. The protection function can be enabled or disabled
via binary setting Func_OL LS. Based on the bay load shedding principle,
only one trip stage is provided for the protection. It operates based on the
measured phase currents. If all of the measured phase currents exceed a
pre-defined threshold (setting I_OL LS), a timer begins to run toward a
pre-defined limit which is the time delay of the protection (setting T_OL LS).
When the time delay elapsed, the trip command is issued.
If the voltage connected to the IED and the binary setting OL LS Chk V On is
set in binary setting OL LS Chk V Off/OL LS Chk V On, the protection would
be blocked as following conditions:

162

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

3.3

The minimum magnitude among of the connected voltages is lower than


the threshold defined by U_Chk. In case of single-phase voltage
connection, only the magnitude of the connected voltage is checked with
setting U_Chk

Rate of voltage change (U/t) exceeds the setting of voltage change


rate dU/dt_LS. The setting corresponds to phase to phase voltage

Rate of frequency change (f/t) exceeds the setting of frequency


change rate dF/dt_LS.

VT fail is detected by the IED or a MCB failure signal is received to the


IED through respective binary input

Input and output signals


IP1

OL LS Trip

IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3
BI8 CB Open

Table 136 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3

UP1

signal for voltage input 1

UP2

signal for voltage input 2

UP3

signal for voltage input 3


Table 137 Binary input list

Signal

Description

BI8 CB Open

Binary input 8 CB open


Table 138 Binary output list

Signal

Description

163

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

OL LS Trip

Overload load shedding trip

3.4

Setting parameter

3.4.1

Setting list
Table 139 Function setting list for overload load shedding protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

In

I_OL LS

2.

T_OL LS

3.

dU/dt_LS

4.

dF/dt_LS

5.

70

U_Chk

Unit

Min.

Max.

50.00

110.00

0.05

60.00

V/S

1.00

10.00

HZ/S

1.00

10.00

10.00

120.0

Current setting for over load load


shedding protection
Time setting for over load load
shedding protection
dU/dt setting for over load load
shedding protection
dF/dt setting for over load load
shedding protection
Voltage checking setting for low
voltage load shedding protection

Table 140 Logical linker list for overload load shedding protection
NO.

Default

1.

On

Abbr.

Explanation

Func_Lv LS

Enable or disable the low voltage load shedding


protection

Table 141 Binary setting list for overload load shedding protection
Bit

Default

2.9

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

3.4

dF(dU)/dt Off

dF(dU)/dt On

3.5

OL LS Chk V Off

OL LS Chk V On

3.5

Explanation
Single phase or three phase
voltage connection
Enable or disable the binary
setting of dF(dU)/dt
Enable or disable the function
of checking voltage

IED reports
Table 142 Event information list

164

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Information

Description

OL LS Trip

Overload load shedding function issues trip command

3.6

Technical data
Table 143 Technical data for load shedding protection

Item

Rang or Value

Tolerance

Under Frequency Load shedding


Frequency for fr =50Hz

45.50 to 50.00 Hz, step 0.01 Hz

20 mHz

Time delay

0.05 to 60.00s, step 0.01

1.5 % setting or +60 ms

Under Voltage Load shedding


Voltage
Time delay

50 to 110 V, step 1V
0.10 to 60.00s, step 0.01 s

3 % setting or 1 V
1.5 % setting or +60 ms, at
80% operating setting

Overload Load shedding


Phase current

0.08 to 20 A for Ir =1A

3% setting or 0.02Ir

0.25 to 100 A for Ir =5A


Time delay

0.10 to 60.00s , step 0.01 s

1.5 % setting or +60 ms, at


200% operating setting

Blocking condition
Frequency change rate f/t

1 to 10 Hz/s

0.5 Hz/s

Voltage change rate u/t

1 to 100 V/s, step 1 V/s

3 % setting or 1 V

Blocking voltage

10 to 120V, step 1 V

3 % setting or 1 V

Blocking current

0 to 2 Ir

3% setting or 0.02Ir

Operating time

Approx. 60 ms

Reset time

Approx. 60 ms

Under voltage blocking reset ratio

Approx. 1

165

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

166

Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme

Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection


scheme

About this chapter


This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for fast busbar protection scheme.

167

Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme

Fast busbar protection scheme

1.1

Function description
The IED provides fast busbar protection which is achieved based on
operation with GOOSE signals, it is able to block the incoming feeder
protection IED function by reception of a defined GOOSE signals from the
outgoing feeder linked with the same busbar.
The principle illustrated in the following figure:

Relay B

GOOSE massage-Block

Relay A

Trip

Relay C
C

Figure 52 Action when fault on the feeder C

If the fault occurs on outgoing feeder C, the protection IED C will trip and send
block messenger to IED A to block IED A relevant protection function.

168

Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme

Relay A

Trip

Relay B

Relay C
C

Figure 53 Action when fault on the Busbar

Once the fault located on the busbar, protection IEDs of outgoing feeder do
not trip and therefore there is no any blocking signal. So the IED A will trip and
clear off the fault with short time delay.

1.2

Input and output signals

IP1
IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3

Table 144 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

169

Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme

IP3

signal for current input 3

UP1

signal for voltage input 1

UP2

signal for voltage input 2

UP3

signal for voltage input 3

1.3

Setting parameter

1.3.1

Setting list

1.4

IED reports
Table 145 Event information list

Information

Description

OC Startup

Three stages over current protections startup

OC Startup Back

Three stages over current protections return

170

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Chapter 20 Secondary system


supervision

About this chapter


This chapter describes the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used in
secondary system supervision function.

171

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Current circuit supervision

1.1

Function principle

1.1.1

Function description
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted
operation of many protection functions such as, earth fault current and
negative sequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring
open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high
voltages will stress the secondary circuit.
To prevent the IED from wrong trip, interruptions in the secondary circuits of
current transformers is detected and reported by the UED. When the zero
sequence current is always larger than the setting value 3I0_CT Fail for 12s,
CT Fail will be reported and each stage of zero sequence current protection
will be blocked if setting Blk EF_CT Fail is selected.

1.1.2

Logic diagram
12s

3I0>

CT Fail

CT Fail On

Figure 54 Logic diagram for current circuit supervision

1.2

Input and output signals


IP1
IP2
IP3
IN

CT Fail

Table 146 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

172

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3

IN

signal for zero sequence current input


Table 147 Binary output list

Signal

Description

CT Fail

CT Fail

1.3

Setting parameter

1.3.1

Setting list
Table 148 Function setting list for current circuit supervision protection

NO.

Default

Abbr.

Explanation

1.

0.5In

3I0_CT Fail

Maximum zero-sequence current for


detecting CT failure

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.05In

2.00In

Table 149 Binary setting list for current circuit supervision protection
Bit

Default

2.13

CT Fail Off

CT Fail On

1.4

Explanation
Enable or disable the function
of CT fail supervising

IED reports
Table 150 Alarm information list

Information

Description

CT Fail

CT failure in circuit of current transformer

173

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure supervision VT

2.1

Introduction
A measured voltage failure, due to a broken conductor or a short circuit fault
in the secondary circuit of voltage transformer, may result in unwanted
operation of the protection functions which work based on voltage criteria. VT
failure supervision function is provided to block these protection functions and
enable the backup protection functions. The features of the function are as
follows:

2.2

Symmetrical/asymmetrical VT failure detection

3-phase AC voltage MCB monitoring

1-phase AC voltage MCB monitoring

Zero and negative sequence current monitoring

Applicable in solid grounded, compensated or isolated networks

Function principle
VT failure supervision function can be enabled or disabled through binary
setting VT Fail On/ VT Fail Off. By applying setting VT Fail On to the binary
setting, VT failure supervision function would monitor the voltage transformer
circuit. As mentioned, the function is able to detect single-phase broken,
two-phase broken or three-phase broken faults in secondary circuit of voltage
transformer, if a three-phase connection is applied.
There are three main criteria for VT failure detection; the first is dedicated to
detect three-phase broken faults. The second and third ones are to detect
single or two-phase broken faults in solid earthed and isolated/resistance
earthed systems, respectively. A precondition to meet these three criteria is
that IED should not be picked up and the calculated zero sequence and
negative sequence currents should be less than setting of 3I02_ VT Fail.
The criteria are as follows:

2.2.1

Three phases (symmetrical) VT Fail


The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 as well as maximum of three
phase-to-earth voltages is less than the setting of Upe_VT Fail and at the
same time, maximum of three phase currents is higher than setting of I_ VT
Fail. This condition may correspond to three phase broken fault in secondary

174

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

circuit of the voltage transformer if no startup element has been detected.

2.2.2

Single/two phases (asymmetrical) VT Fail


The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 is more than the setting of
Upe_VT Fail. This condition may correspond to single or two-phase broken
fault in secondary circuit of the voltage transformer, if the system starpoint is
solidly earthed and no startup element has been detected.
The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 is more than the setting of
Upe_VT Fail, and at the same time, the difference between the maximum
and minimum phase-to-phase voltages is more than the setting of Upp_VT
Fail. This condition may correspond to single or two-phase broken fault in
secondary circuit of the voltage transformer, if the system starpoint is isolated
or resistance earthed and no startup element has been detected.
In addition to the mentioned conditions, IED has the capability to be informed
about the VT MCB failure through its binary inputs V3p MCB Fail and V1p
MCB Fail. In this context, VT fail is detected, if the respective binary input is
active.

2.2.3

The fourth voltage U4 VT fail


The IED is also capable to detect VT MCB failure of the forth input voltage U4
through its binary input V1P MCB Fail. In this context, VT fail is detected for
U4, if the respective binary input is active. As mentioned previously, U4 input
voltage can be used for in conjunction with reclosure function (setting 3U0
Calculated) or as 3U0 which can be used for earth fault protection or
displacement voltage protection (setting 3U0 Measured). When the fourth
input voltage is used as 3U0, activation of binary input V1P MCB Fail may
lead to block condition for the corresponding functions which operate based
on the measured 3U0 voltage. Similarly, when it is used as synchronization
purposes, activation of binary input V1P MCB Fail would result in blocking
condition for synchronization function.

2.2.4

Logic diagram
If VT failure supervision detects a failure in voltage transformer secondary
circuit, either by means of the above mentioned criteria or reception of a VT
MCB fail indication, all the protection functions which operate based on
direction component or low voltage criteria can be blocked, depending on the
175

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

setting. Furthermore, alarm report VT Fail is issued after 10s time delay. If
the VT Fail criteria recovers within this 10s time delay, the blocking condition
would be removed if one of the following conditions is met. Furthermore, it
should be noted that no VT MCB fail indication should be present during this
condition.
Without relay pickup, minimum phase voltage becomes more than setting of
Upe_VT Normal for 500ms. It is mentioned that with single phase
connection by setting 1-PH V Connect, only the connected voltage is
checked.
Without relay pickup, minimum phase voltage becomes more than setting of
Upe_VT Normal and at the same time, the calculated zero sequence or
negative sequence current of corresponding side becomes more than the
setting of 3I02_ VT Fail. It is mentioned that with single phase connection by
setting 1-PH V Connect, only the connected voltage is checked.
Subsequent to reporting VT fail alarm, the blocking condition of respective
protection functions would be removed if without relay pickup, the minimum
phase voltage becomes more than the setting of Upe_VT Normal for a
duration more than 10s. Furthermore, it should be noted that no VT MCB fail
indication should be present during this condition.

0
3Ph CB Open

VT Chk CB Off
VT Chk CB On

AND

Max{Ua,Ub,Uc}<
3U0 <
Solid Earthed

OR

3U0 >=
Isolate/Resist

OR
Max{Uab,Ubc,Uca}Min{Uab,Ubc,Uca}>

VT Fail On

10S

Alarm

AND
VT Fail

V3P MCB Fail

Figure 55 VT Logic diagram of VT failure supervision for three phase voltage inputs

V1p MCB Fail

VT Check On

10S

V1p VT Fail

176

Alarm

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Figure 56 VT Logic diagram of VT failure supervision for U4 input

2.3

Input and output signals


IP1
IP2
IP3
IN
UP1
UP2
UP3

VT Fail
V1P VT Fail

UP4
V3P MCB Fail
V1P MCB Fail

Table 151 Analog input list


Signal

Description

IP1

signal for current input 1

IP2

signal for current input 2

IP3

signal for current input 3

IN

Signal for zero sequence current input

UP1

signal for voltage input 1

UP2

signal for voltage input 2

UP3

signal for voltage input 3

UP4

signal for voltage input 4


Table 152 Binary input list

Signal

Description

V3P MCB Fail

Three phase MCB VT fail

V1P MCB Fail

Single phase MCB VT fail


Table 153 Binary output list

Signal

Description

VT Fail

VT fail

V1P MCB Fail

Single phase MCB VT fail

2.4

Setting parameter

2.4.1

Setting list
177

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Table 154 Function setting list for fuse failure supervision protection
NO.

Default

Abbr.

1.

0.2In

I_VT Fail

Explanation
Maximum current for detecting VT
failure

Unit

Min.

Max.

0.05In

0.25In

0.05In

0.25In

7.00

20.0

10.00

30.0

40.00

65.00

Maximum zero- and negative2.

0.2In

3I02_VT Fail

sequence current for detecting VT


failure
Maximum phase to earth voltage

3.

Upe_VT Fail

4.

16

Upp_VT Fail

5.

40

Upe_VT Normal

for detecting VT failure


Maximum phase to phase voltage
for detecting VT failure
Minimum normal phase to earth
for VT restoring

Table 155 Binary setting list for fuse failure supervision protection
Bit

Default

2.9

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

2.10

Isolate/ Resist

Solid earthed

2.15

VT Fail Off

VT Fail On

2.5

Explanation
Single phase or three phase
voltage connection
Solid earthed system or
isolated system
Enable or disable the function
of VT failure

IED reports
Table 156 Alarm information list

Information

Description

VT Fail

VT failure in circuit of voltage transformer

V1P VT Fail

VT failure in circuit of the forth voltage transformer

2.6

Technical data
Table 157 Technical data for VT secondary circuit supervision

Item

Range or value

Tolerances

Minimum current

0.08Ir to 0.20Ir, step 0.01A

3% setting or 0.02Ir

Minimum zero or negative

0.08Ir to 0.20Ir, step 0.01A

5% setting or 0.02Ir

sequence current

178

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Maximum phase to earth voltage

7.0V to 20.0V, step 0.01V

3% setting or 1 V

Maximum phase to phase

10.0V to 30.0V, step 0.01V

3% setting or 1 V

40.0V to 65.0V, step 0.01V

3% setting or 1 V

voltage
Normal phase to earth voltage

179

Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

180

Chapter 21 Monitoring function

Chapter 21 Monitoring function

About this chapter


This chapter describes the protection principle, input and output
signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used in
monitoring function.

181

Chapter 21 Monitoring function

Switching devices status monitoring


The function is used to monitor the service status of circuit breaker. The
conditions such as spring charging status, gas pressure, etc., are available
for the protection IED.
The AR function will be blocked and alarm will be issued in case of something
wrong with CB.

182

Self-supervision

All modules can perform self-supervision to its key hardware components


and program as soon as energizing. Parts of the modules are
self-supervised in real time. All internal faults or abnormal conditions will
initiate an alarm. The fatal faults among them will result in the whole IED
blocked

CRC checks for the setting, program and configuration, etc.

Chapter 22 Station communication

Chapter 22 Station communication

About this chapter


This chapter describes the communication possibilities in a
SA-system.

183

Chapter 22 Station communication

Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to
one or many substation level systems or equipment.
Following communication protocols are available:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

60870-5-103 communication protocol

The IED is able to connect to one or more substation level systems or


equipments simultaneously, through the communication ports with
communication protocols supported.

1.1

Protocol

1.1.1

IEC61850-8 communication protocol


IEC 61850-8-1 allows two or more intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from
one or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in the
performance of their functions and for correct co-operation.
GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC
61850-8-1 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control
information amongst themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That
is, upon detecting an event, the IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify
those devices that have registered to receive the data. An IED can, by
publishing a GOOSE message, report its status. It can also request a control
action to be directed at any device in the network.

1.1.2

IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol


The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a
protection IED communicates with a third party control or monitoring system.
This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit
serial communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC
terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave.

184

Chapter 22 Station communication

The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must


have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages. For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the
IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103:
Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.

1.2

Communication port

1.2.1

Front communication port


There is a serial RS232 port on the front plate of all the IEDs. Through this
port, the IED can be connected to the personal computer for setting, testing,
and configuration using the dedicated Sifang software tool.

1.2.2

RS485 communication ports


One isolated electrical RS485 communication ports are provided to connect
with substation automation system. These two ports can work in parallel for
IEC60870-5-103.

1.2.3

Ethernet communication ports


Up to 2 electrical or optical Ethernet communication ports are provided to
connect with substation automation system. These two ports can work in
parallel for one protocol, IEC61850 or IEC60870-5-103.

1.3

Technical data
Front communication port
Item

Data

Number

Connection

Isolated, RS232; front panel,


9-pin subminiature connector, for software tools

Communication speed

9600 baud

Max. length of communication cable

15 m

185

Chapter 22 Station communication

RS485 communication port


Item

Data

Number

1, only

Connection

2-wire connector
Rear port in communication module

Max. length of communication cable

1.0 km

Test voltage

500 V AC against earth

For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


Communication speed

Factory setting 9600 baud,


Min. 1200 baud, Max. 19200 baud

Ethernet communication port


Item

Data
Electrical communication port

Number

0 to 3

Connection

RJ45 connector
Rear port in communication module

Max. length of communication cable

100m

For IEC 61850 protocol


Communication speed

100 Mbit/s

For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


Communication speed

100 Mbit/s
Optical communication port ( optional )

Number

0 to 2

Connection

SC connector
Rear port in communication module

Optical cable type

Multi-mode

IEC 61850 protocol


Communication speed

100 Mbit/s

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


Communication speed
Note: There is not optical Ethernet port in CSC211

Time synchronization
186

100 Mbit/s

Chapter 22 Station communication

Item

Data

Mode

Pulse mode

IRIG-B signal format

IRIG-B000

Connection

2-wire connector
Rear port in communication module

Voltage levels

differential input

187

Chapter 22 Station communication

1.4

Typical substation communication scheme


The IED is able to connect to one or more substation level systems or
equipments simultaneously, through the communication ports with
communication protocols supported.
Server or Work
Station 1

Work Station 3

Server or Work
Station 2

Switch

Net 1: IEC61850/IEC103,Ethernet Port A

Switch

Net 2: IEC61850/IEC103,Ethernet Port B

Switch

Switch

Gateway
or
converter

Switch

Net 3: IEC103, RS485 Port A

Figure 57 Connection example for multi-networks of station automation system

1.5

Typical time synchronizing scheme


All IEDs feature a permanently integrated electrical time synchronization port
(shown in Figure 58). It can be used to feed timing telegrams in IRIG-B or
pulse format into the IEDs via time synchronization receivers. The IED can
adapt the second or minute pulse in the pulse mode automatically.
Meanwhile, SNTP network time synchronization can be applied.

SNTP

Ethernet port

IRIG-B

IRIG-B port

Pulse

Binary input

Figure 58 Time synchronizing modes

188

Chapter 23 Hardware

Chapter 23 Hardware

About this chapter


This chapter describes the IED hardware.

189

Chapter 23 Hardware

Introduction

1.1

IED structure
The enclosure for IED is 1/2 19 inches in width and 4U in height.

1.2

190

The IED is flush mounting with panel cutout and cabinet.

Connection terminals to other system on the rear.

The front panel of IED is aluminum alloy by founding in integer and


overturn downwards. LCD, LED and setting keys are mounted on the
panel. There is a serial interface on the panel suitable for connecting a
PC.

Draw-out modules for serviceability are fixed by lock component.

The modules can be combined through the bus on the rear board. Both
the IED and the other system can be combined through the rear
interfaces.

IED module arrangement

Chapter 23 Hardware

X7
PSM

X6
FOM

X5
FIO

X4
CPU

X3
BIO

X2
AIM

X1
AIM

Figure 59 Rear view of the protection IED

191

Chapter 23 Hardware

Local human-machine interface

2.1

Introduction
The human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole
front plate is divided into zones, each of which has a well-defined
functionality:

3
2

7
5

Figure 60 The view of IED front plate

2.2

1.

Liquid crystal display (LCD)

2.

LEDs

3.

Arrow keys

4.

Reset key

5.

Quit key

6.

Set key

7.

RS232 communication port

Liquid crystal display (LCD)


The LCD back light of HMI is blue, 5 lines can be displayed.

192

Chapter 23 Hardware

When operating keys are pressed or in the case of IED alarming or operating
report appearance, the back light will turn on automatically until the preset
time delay elapse after the latest operation or alarm.

2.3

LED
There are 11 LEDs on the left side of the LCD. The definition for each LED is
shown as following table.
Table 158 HMI keys on the front of the IED

NO.

Definition

1.

Run/Alarm

2.

OC

3.

EF

4.

SEF

5.

NSOC

Color

Explanation

Green

The IED operate nomally

Red

The alarm is issued

Green

The linker of overcurrent protection is enabled

Red

The overcurrent protection operate

Green

The linker of earth fault protection is enabled

Red

The earth fault protection operate

Green

The linker of sensitive earth fault protection is enabled

Red

The sensitive earth fault protection operate

Green
Red

6.

CBF/DZ

7.

Themal OL

8.

3V0

9.

10.

11.

OV/UV

Load SHED

AR/MC

Green

enabled
The negative sequence overcurrent protection operate
The linker of circuit breaker failure or dead zone protection
is enabled

Red

The circuit breaker failure or dead zone protection operate

Green

The linker of thermal overload protection is enabled

Red

The thermal overload protection operate

Green

The linker of displacement voltage protection is enabled

Red

The displacement voltage protection operate

Green

The linker of overvoltage or undervoltage protection is


enabled

Red

The overvoltage or undervoltage protection operate

Green

The linker of load shedding protection is enabled

Red

The load shedding protection operate

Green
Red

2.4

The linker of negative sequence overcurrent protection is

The linker of autorecloser or manual reclose function is


enabled
The autorecloser or manual reclose function operate

Keyboard
193

Chapter 23 Hardware

The keyboard is used to monitor and operate IED. The keyboard has the
same look and feel in CSC family. As shown in Figure 60, keyboard is divided
into Arrow keys, Reset key, Quit key and Set key. The specific instructions on
the keys as the following table described:
Table 159 HMI keys on the front of the IED
Key

Function

Up arrow key

Move up in menu

Page up between screens

Increase value in setting

Move down in menu

Page down between screens

Decrease value in setting

Down arrow key

Left arrow key

Move left in menu

Right arrow key

Move Right in menu

Reset key

Reset the LEDs

Return to normal scrolling display state directly

Enter main menu or submenu

Confirm the setting change

Back to previous menu

Cancel the current operation and back to previous menu

Return to scrolling display state

Lock or unlock current display in the scrolling display state (the

Set key
Quit key

lock state is indicated by a "solid diamond" type icon on the botton


right corner of the LCD)

2.5

IED menu

2.5.1

Menu construction

194

Chapter 23 Hardware

Analog

BI

Metering

Connect

Energy

GOOSEINF

GOO Ctrl

GOOSESUB

Switch

Time

Connect

GOO Ctrl

Read

Switch

Write

Delete

Event

Operation

Alarm

Clear

OpStatus

OpConfig

Settings

Report

Wave

MainMenu
ComConf

Eth 1#

Serial

Eth 2#

Label

Monitor

Testing

BO

Zero

BI

Remote

LED Test

TestMode

Accuracy

DevSetup

DevInfo

Module

Print

Remote

Metering

SysParam

Backlit

Version

OpInfo

Table 160 Full name for the menu


Sub-menu

Full name

OpStatus

Operation status

Sub-sub menu

Full name

Analog

Analog

Metering

Metering

195

Chapter 23 Hardware

Sub-menu

OpConfig

Settings

Report

ComConf

Testing

DevSetup

DevInfo

2.5.2
196

Full name

Sub-sub menu

Full name

Energy

Energy

GOO Ctrl

GOOSE control

BI

Binary input

Connect

Connector

GOOSEINF

COOSE information

GOOSESUB

GOOSE subscribe

Switch

Switch

Operation

Connect

Connector

configuration

Time

Time

GOO Ctrl

GOOSE control

Read

Read

Write

write

Switch

Switch

Delete

Delete

Event

Event

Alarm

Alarm

Wave

Wave

Operation

Operation

Clear

Clear

Eth 1#

Ethernet port 1

Eth 2#

Ethernet port 2

Monitor

Monitor

Serial

Serial port

Label

Label

BO

Binary output

BI

Binary input

LED Test

LED Test

Accuracy

Accuracy

Zero

Zero drift

Remote

Remote

TestMode

Test mode

Module

Module

Remote

Remote

SysParam

System parameter

Print

Print

Metering

Metering

Backlit

Back light

Device

Version

Version

information

OpInfo

Operation information

Settings

Report

Communication
configuration

Testing

Device setup

Operation status

Chapter 23 Hardware

Sub menu

OpConfig

2.5.3
Sub menu

OpConfig

2.5.4
Sub menu

OpConfig

2.5.5
Sub menu

Settings

2.5.6

Sub-sub menu

Explanation

Analog

Read the analog input of the IED

Metering

Read the measurement analog input of the IED

Energy

Read the energy inputs of the IED

GOO Ctrl

Read the status of the GOOSE connector

BI

Read the status of binary inputs

Connect

Read the status of the connector

GOOSEINF

Read the transmission of the report

GOOSESUB

Read the information of the GOOSE

Operation status
Sub-sub menu

Explanation

Analog

Read the analog input of the IED

Metering

Read the measurement analog input of the IED

Energy

Read the energy inputs of the IED

GOO Ctrl

Read the status of the GOOSE connector

BI

Read the status of binary inputs

Connect

Read the status of the connector

GOOSEINF

Read the transmission of the report

GOOSESUB

Read the information of the GOOSE

Operation configuration
Sub-sub menu

Explanation

Switch

Switching setting group

Connect

Enable or disable the protection function

Time

Setting the current time of the IED

GOO Ctrl

Function related GOOSE ON/OFF

Settings
Sub-sub menu

Explanation

Read

Read the settings

Write

Set the settings

Switch

Switch setting group

Delete

Delete settings

Report
197

Chapter 23 Hardware

Sub menu

Report

Sub-sub menu

Explanation

Event

Display latest 40 event records

Alarm

Display latest 40 alarm records

Wave

Display latest 10 recording wave

Operation

Display latest 40 IED operation records


Clear all history reports saved by the IED and delete

Clear

2.5.7
Sub menu

ComConf

unnecessary test records before IED operation.

Communication configuration
Sub-sub menu

Explanation

Eth 1#

Set Ethernet port 1 in CPU module.

Eth 2#

Set Ethernet port 2 in CPU module.

Monitor

Set parameter related BIO module

Serial

Serial 1 is used for SIO in panel, serial 2 is used for 485


port in CPU module and Serial 3 is reserved for dual
485 CPU module.

Label

2.5.8
Sub menu

Set IED address (hex), STA name and Bay name

Testing
Sub-sub

Sub-sub-sub

menu

menu

BO

Test the binary outputs

BI

Test the binary inputs

LED Test

Test the panel LED


Test the analog quantites precision and

Accuracy

linearity

Zero

Testing

Explanation

Remote

View the zero drift


Event

Report event report to monitor and SCADA

Alarm

Report alarm report to monitor and SCADA

Signal
Metering

Report the virtual SOE event to the monitor


and SCADA
Report virtual remote measurement
over-limit event to the monitor and SCADA
The IED enters/exit test state, and it will not
send the event information to the local

TestMode

monitor and remote communication under


the test state. The IED should exit the test
status after the test completed

198

Chapter 23 Hardware

2.5.9
Sub menu

Device setup
Sub-sub

Sub-sub-sub

menu

menu

Explanation
Hardware support is necessary, the setup

NetConf

must be consistent with the hardware, and


LON/485/Ethernet are optional
The default is the soft connector mode, for
soft and hard combined mode, only the

Module

Connect

specific protection hard contact is provided,


the other protection hard connector starts up
by default

BIO
sql

BIO module setup depends on the practical


equipment
AI module setup depends on the practical

CSC2000

equipment
Setup of CSC2000 protocol, identify the
communication requirement of this station
and practical hardware configuration
Setup of 103 protocol, identify the

Prot103

communication requirement of this station


and practical hardware configuration

Remote

Setup of 61850 protocol, identify the


IEC61850

DevSetup

communication requirement of this station


and practical hardware configuration
Setup of signal, protocol version, report

Signal

parameter and time synchronization, identify


the external condition of this station

Modify
SysParam
Default
Print

Setup of the related parameters for external


conditions
Load the default value when upgrade CPU
program
Set network printer address
Adjust the compensation coefficient of the

Zero

measurement module under the zero input


status

Scale
Metering

Save

Scale adjustment
Confirm and save zero setup and scale
setup
Clear the current memorized operation value

Reset

of the measurement module (power and


impulse counter)

Backlit

Set the back light to keep constant on or

199

Chapter 23 Hardware

Sub menu

Sub-sub

Sub-sub-sub

menu

menu

Explanation
automatically turn off when the keyboard is
free

2.5.10
Sub menu

Device information
Sub-sub

Sub-sub-sub

menu

menu

Explanation
Display the version of protection program,

Version

protection scheme, HMI program, and IED


firmware.

DevInfo

BIO Com
OpInfo
HMI

200

Display operation statistical data of the BIO


communication.
Display operation statistical data of the MMI
communication.

Chapter 23 Hardware

Analog input module

3.1

Introduction
The analogue input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers.
3 dedicated high accurate current transformers (optional) are used for
metering.
There are four kinds of AIM, Module A, Module B, Module C and Module D
series.
AIM A series provides up to 2 current input channels.
AIM B series provides up to 2 current input channels and 3 voltage input
channels.
AIM C series provides up to 5 current input channels.
AIM D series provides up to 6 current input channels and 4 voltage input
channels.

201

Chapter 23 Hardware

3.2

Terminals of analog input module


Terminals of Analogue Input Module A series
I01
I02

Protection

I03
I04
I05
I06
I07
I08
I09

Metering

I10
I11
I12

Figure 61 Terminals arrangement of AIM A series


Table 161 Description of terminals of AIM A series

Terminal

Analogue
Input

I01

I1

I02

I1

I03

Null

I04

Null

I05

Null

I06

Null

I07

Null

I08

Null

I09

Null

I10

Null

I11

ImB

I12

ImB

Remark
Star point

Star point,
for metering
For
metering

Terminals of Analogue Input Module B series


202

Chapter 23 Hardware

I01
I02

Protection

U03
U04
U05
U06
U07
U08
I09

Metering

I10
I11
I12

Figure 62 Terminals arrangement of AIM B series


Table 162 Description of terminals of AIM B series

Terminal

Analogue
Input

I01

I1

I02

I1

U03

UC1

U04

UC1

U05

UC2

U06

UC2

U07

UC3

U08

UC3

I09

Null

I10

Null

I11

ImB

I12

ImB

Remark
Star point
Star point
Star point
Star point

Star point,
for metering
For
metering

Terminals of Analogue Input Module C series

203

Chapter 23 Hardware

I01
I02

Protection

I03
I04
I05
I06
I07
I08
I09

Metering

I10
I11
I12

Figure 63 Terminals arrangement of AIM C series


Table 163 Description of terminals of AIM C series

Terminal

Analogue
Input

I01

I1

I02

I1

I03

IC1

I04

IC1

I05

IC2

I06

IC2

I07

IC3

I08

IC3

I09

Null

I10

Null

I11

ImB

I12

ImB

Remark
Star point
Star point
Star point
Star point

Star point,
for metering
For
metering

Terminals of Analogue Input Module D series

204

Chapter 23 Hardware

I01
I02

Protection

I03
I04
I05
I06
I07
I08

Metering

I09
I10
I11

3Ph voltage

I12

U01
U02
U03

1Ph voltage

U04

U05
U06

Figure 64 Terminals arrangement of AIM D series


Table 164 Description of terminals AIM D-1 of AIM D series
Terminal

Analogue Input

Remark

I01

IA

Star point

I02

IA

I03

IB

I04

IB

I05

IC

I06

IC

I07

I0

I08

I0

Star point
Star point
Star point
Star point

I09

ImA

For
metering

205

Chapter 23 Hardware

ImA

I10

For
metering
Star point

I11

ImC

For
metering

ImC

I12

For
metering

Table 165 Description of terminals AIM D-2 of AIM D series

3.3

Terminal

Definition

Remark

U01

UA

Star point

U02

UB

Star point

U03

UC

Star point

U04

UN

U05

U4

U06

U4

Star point

Technical data
Internal current transformer
Item

Rated current Ir

Standard

IEC 60255-1

Data
1 or 5 A

Nominal current range

0.05 Ir to 30 Ir

Nominal current range of sensitive

0.005 to 1 A

CT
0.1 VA at Ir = 1 A;

Power consumption (per phase)

0.5 VA at Ir = 5 A
0.5 VA for sensitive CT

IEC 60255-1

100 Ir for 1 s

IEC 60255-27

4 Ir continuous

Thermal overload capability for

IEC 60255-27

100 A for 1 s

sensitive CT

DL/T 478-2001

3 A continuous

Thermal overload capability

Internal voltage transformer


Item

206

Standard

Data

Chapter 23 Hardware

IEC 60255-1

Rated voltage Vr (ph-ph)


Nominal range (ph-e)

100 V /110 V
0.4 V to 120 V

Power consumption at Vr = 110 V

IEC 60255-27

0.1 VA per phase

DL/T 478-2001
Thermal

overload

(phase-neutral voltage)

capability

IEC 60255-27

2 Vr, for 10s

DL/T 478-2001

1.5 Vr, continuous

207

Chapter 23 Hardware

Fast binary Input & Output module

4.1

Introduction
In this module, the fast binary inputs are used to connect with the signals and
alarms. The fast binary outputs are used for the tripping outputs and initiating
outputs for protection functions, or signaling output.
4 binary inputs and 7 binary output relays are provided in this module.

4.2

208

Terminals of fast binary input & output module

Chapter 23 Hardware

Binary inputs

01
02
03
04
05

DC -

06
07
Relay 1

08
09
Relay 2

Relay 3

12
13
Relay 4

14
15

Binary outputs

10
11

Relay 5

16
17
Relay 6

18
19
Relay 7

20

Figure 65 Terminals arrangement of FIO


Table 166 Definition of terminals of FIO

Terminal

Definition

01

Binary input 1

02

Binary input 2

03

Binary input 3

04

Binary input 4

05

Output
relay

Common terminal
for all binary inputs

209

Chapter 23 Hardware

above, connect with


DC negative
terminal

4.3

06

Null

07

Trip contact 1-1

Relay 1

08

Trip contact 1-0

Relay 1

09

Trip contact 2-1

Relay 2

10

Trip contact 2-0

Relay 2

11

Trip contact 3-1

Relay 3

12

Trip contact 3-0

Relay 3

13

Trip contact 4-1

Relay 4

14

Trip contact 4-0

Relay 4

15

Trip contact 5-1

Relay 5

16

Trip contact 5-0

Relay 5

17

Trip contact 6-1

Relay 6

18

Trip contact 6-0

Relay 6

19

Trip contact 7-1

Relay 7

20

Trip contact 7-0

Relay 7

Technical data
Binary inputs
Item

Input voltage range

Standard
IEC60255-1

Data
110/125 V
220/250 V

Threshold1: guarantee

IEC60255-1

operation

154V, for 220/250V


77V, for 110V/125V

Threshold2: uncertain operation

IEC60255-1

132V, for 220/250V

66V, for 110V/125V


Response time/reset time

IEC60255-1

Software

provides

de-bounce

time
Power consumption, energized

IEC60255-1

Max. 0.5 W/input, 110V


Max. 1 W/input, 220V

Binary outputs
210

Chapter 23 Hardware

Item

Standard

Data
/~

Max. system voltage

IEC60255-1

250V

Current carrying capacity

IEC60255-1

5 A continuous,
30A200ms ON, 15s OFF

Making capacity

IEC60255-1

1100 W(

) at inductive load with

L/R>40 ms
1000 VA(AC)
Breaking capacity

Mechanical endurance, Unloaded

IEC60255-1

IEC60255-1

220V

, 0.15A, at L/R40 ms

110V

, 0.30A, at L/R40 ms

50,000,000 cycles (3 Hz switching


frequency)

Mechanical endurance, making

IEC60255-1

1000 cycles

Mechanical endurance, breaking

IEC60255-1

1000 cycles

Specification state verification

IEC60255-1

UL/CSATV

IEC60255-23
IEC61810-1
Contact circuit resistance

IEC60255-1

measurement

IEC60255-23

30m

IEC61810-1
Open Contact insulation test (AC

IEC60255-1

Dielectric strength)

IEC60255-27

Maximum temperature of parts and

IEC60255-1

AC1000V 1min

55

materials

211

Chapter 23 Hardware

Fast binary output module

5.1

Introduction
This module is used to provide fast tripping outputs and initiating outputs for
protection functions, and signaling output.
10 binary output relays with 10 contacts in 5 groups are provided in the FOM.

5.2

Terminals of fast binary output module


01
02
03

Relay 1

04
05
06

Relay 2

08
09
10
11

Relay 3

12
13
14
15

Binary outputs

07

Relay 4

16
17
18
19

Relay 5

20

Figure 66 Terminals arrangement of FOM

212

Chapter 23 Hardware

Table 167 Definition of terminals of FOM

Terminal

Definition

Output relay

01

Trip contact 1-1-1

Relay 1

02

Trip contact 1-1-0

Relay 1

03

Trip contact 1-2-1

Relay 1

04

Trip contact 1-2-0

Relay 1

05

Trip contact 2-1-1

Relay 2

06

Trip contact 2-1-0

Relay 2

07

Trip contact 2-2-1

Relay 2

08

Trip contact 2-2-0

Relay 2

09

Trip contact 3-1-1

Relay 3

10

Trip contact 3-1-0

Relay 3

11

Trip contact 3-2-1

Relay 3

12

Trip contact 3-2-0

Relay 3

13

Trip contact 4-1-1

Relay 4

14

Trip contact 4-1-0

Relay 4

15

Trip contact 4-2-1

Relay 4

16

Trip contact 4-2-0

Relay 4

17

Trip contact 5-1-1

Relay 5

18

Trip contact 5-1-0

Relay 5

19

Trip contact 5-2-1

Relay 5

20

Trip contact 5-2-0

Relay 5

213

Chapter 23 Hardware

Binary input & output module

6.1

Introduction
In this module, the output contacts are used for controlling and signaling
outputs mainly. The binary inputs are used to connect with the input signals
and alarms. 7 binary inputs and 9 binary output relays have been provided in
this module.

6.2

214

Terminals of binary & output module

Chapter 23 Hardware

01
Relay 1

02
Relay 2

03
04
05
06
Relay 4

07
Relay 5

08
09

Binary outputs

Relay 3

Relay 6

10
Relay 7

11
12
Relay 8

13
Relay 9

14
15
16

Binary inputs

17
18
19
20
21
22

DC -

Figure 67 Terminals arrangement of BIOTable 168 Definition of terminals of BIO

Terminal

Definition

01

Contact group 1-0

02

Contact group 1-1

Remark
Common
terminal
Relay 1

215

Chapter 23 Hardware

03

Contact group 1-2

Relay 2

04

Contact 2-0

Relay 3

05

Contact 2-1

Relay 3

06

Contact group 3-0

07

Contact group 3-1

Relay 4

08

Contact group 3-2

Relay 5

09

Contact group 4-0

10

Contact group 4-1

Relay 6

11

Contact group 4-2

Relay 7

12

Contact group 5-0

13

Contact group 5-1

Relay 8

14

Contact group 5-2

Relay 9

15

Binary input 1

16

Binary input 2

17

Binary input 3

18

Binary input 4

19

Binary input 5

20

Binary input 6

21

Binary input 7
Common terminal
for all binary

22

inputs, connect
with AUX.DC
negative terminal

216

Common
terminal

Common
terminal

Common
terminal

Chapter 23 Hardware

CPU module

7.1

Introduction
The CPU module handles all protection functions and logic, hardware
self-supervision and performs communication and information exchange
between the protection system and external equipments such as HMI, PC,
monitor, control system, substation automation system, engineer station,
RTU and printer, etc. Additionally, the CPU module transmits remote
metering, remote signaling, SOE, event reports and record data. The module
also provides binary inputs, synchronization and communication ports.
The pulse, IRIG-B or SNTP mode can be applied for time synchronization.
According to requirement, up to 2 isolated electrical or optical Ethernet ports
(optical Ethernet ports optional) and 1 RS485 serial communication port can
be provided to meet the demands of different substation automation system
and RTU at the same time.
There are 7 binary input channels with DC24V in the CPU module.

7.2

Terminals of CPU module

217

Chapter 23 Hardware

01

Binary inputs

02
03
04
05
06
07

Time
Synchro

08
09
10

COM

11

Ethernet ports

12

Figure 68 Terminals arrangement of CPU


Table 169 Definition of terminals of CPU

218

Terminal

Definition

01

Binary input 1

02

Binary input 2

03

Binary input 3

04

Binary input 4

05

Binary input 5

06

Binary input 6

07

Binary input 7

Chapter 23 Hardware

08

Common terminal for all


binary inputs above, connect
with DC -24V. terminal

09

Time synchronization

10

Time synchronization GND

11

RS485 port - 1B

12

RS485 port - 1A

Ethernet

Optional optical fiber or RJ45

Port A

port for station automation


system

Ethernet

Optional optical fiber or RJ45

Port B

port for station automation


system

7.3

Technical data
Front communication port
Item

Data

Number

Connection

Isolated, RS232; front panel,


9-pin subminiature connector, for software tools

Communication speed

9600 baud

Max. length of communication cable

15 m

RS485 communication port


Item

Data

Number

1, only

Connection

2-wire connector
Rear port in communication module

Max. length of communication cable

1.0 km

Test voltage

500 V AC against earth

For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


Communication speed

Factory setting 9600 baud,


Min. 1200 baud, Max. 19200 baud

219

Chapter 23 Hardware

Ethernet communication port


Item

Data
Electrical communication port

Number

0 to 3

Connection

RJ45 connector
Rear port in communication module

Max. length of communication cable

100m

For IEC 61850 protocol


Communication speed

100 Mbit/s

For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


Communication speed

100 Mbit/s

Time synchronization
Item

Data

Mode

Pulse mode

IRIG-B signal format

IRIG-B000

Connection

2-wire connector
Rear port in communication module

Voltage levels

220

differential input

Chapter 23 Hardware

Power supply module

8.1

Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and
full isolation between the terminal and the battery system. The module
provides 9 binary input channels as well.

8.2

Terminals of power supply module

221

Chapter 23 Hardware

01
02
03

Binary inputs

04
05
06
07
08
09

11

DC
24V +

12

DC
24V -

13
Relay 1

14

DC 24V
output

DC -

Alarm

10

16

DC+
input

17
18

DCinput

Power input

15

19
20

Figure 69 Terminals arrangement of PSM


Table 170 Definition of terminals of PSM

Terminal

222

Definition

Chapter 23 Hardware

01

Binary input 1

02

Binary input 2

03

Binary input 3

04

Binary input 4

05

Binary input 5

06

Binary input 6

07

Binary input 7

08

Binary input 8

09

Binary input 9
Common terminal for all
binary inputs above,

10

connect with AUX.DC


negative terminal

8.3

11

AUX.DC 24V+ output

12

AUX.DC 24V- output

13

Alarm contact (NC) 0

14

Alarm contact (NC) 1

15

Isolated terminal, not wired

16

AUX. power input 1, DC +

17

Isolated terminal, not wired

18

AUX. power input 2, DC -

19

Isolated terminal, not wired

20

Terminal for earthing

Technical data
Item

Rated auxiliary voltage Uaux

Standard
IEC60255-1

Data
100 to 125V
195 to 250V

Permissible tolerance

IEC60255-1

%20 Uaux

Power consumption at quiescent

IEC60255-1

50 W per power supply module

IEC60255-1

60 W per power supply module

IEC60255-1

T 5 ms/I 35 A

state
Power consumption at maximum
load
Inrush Current

223

Chapter 23 Hardware

Technical data

9.1

Type tests
Insulation test
Item

Standard

Data

Over voltage category

IEC60255-27

Category III

Pollution degree

IEC60255-27

Degree 2

Insulation

IEC60255-27

Basic insulation

Degree of protection (IP)

IEC60255-27

Front plate: IP40

IEC 60529

Rear, side, top and bottom: IP 30

IEC 60255-5

2KV, 50Hz

EN 60255-5

2.8kV

ANSI C37.90

between the following circuits:

GB/T 15145-2001

auxiliary power supply

DL/T 478-2001

CT / VT inputs

Power

frequency

withstand test

high

voltage

binary inputs
binary outputs
case earth
500V, 50Hz
between the following circuits:
Communication ports to case
earth
time synchronization terminals
to case earth
Impulse voltage test

IEC60255-5

5kV (1.2/50s, 0.5J)

IEC 60255-27

If Ui63V

EN 60255-5

1kV if Ui<63V

ANSI C37.90

Tested between the following

GB/T 15145-2001

circuits:

DL/T 478-2001

auxiliary power supply


CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
case earth
Note: Ui: Rated voltage

Insulation resistance

224

IEC60255-5

100 M at 500 V

Chapter 23 Hardware

IEC 60255-27

EN 60255-5
ANSI C37.90
GB/T 15145-2001
DL/T 478-2001
Protective bonding resistance

IEC60255-27

0.1

Fire withstand/flammability

IEC60255-27

Class V2

Electromagnetic compatibility tests


Item
1 MHz burst immunity test

Standard

Data

IEC60255-22-1

Class III

IEC60255-26

2.5 kV CM ; 1 kV DM

IEC61000-4-18

Tested on the following circuits:

EN 60255-22-1

auxiliary power supply

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1

CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
1 kV CM ; 0 kV DM
Tested on the following circuits:
communication ports

Electrostatic discharge

IEC 60255-22-2

Level 4

IEC 61000-4-2

8 kV contact discharge;

EN 60255-22-2

15 kV air gap discharge;


both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330

Radiated electromagnetic field

IEC 60255-22-3

Frequency sweep:

disturbance test

EN 60255-22-3

80 MHz 1 GHz; 1.4 GHz 2.7 GHz


spot frequencies:
80 MHz; 160 MHz; 380 MHz; 450
MHz; 900 MHz; 1850 MHz; 2150
MHz
10 V/m
AM, 80%, 1 kHz

Radiated electromagnetic field

IEC 60255-22-3

Pulse-modulated

disturbance test

EN 60255-22-3

10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition rate


200 Hz, on duration 50 %

Electric fast transient/burst immunity

IEC 60255-22-4,

Class A, 4KV

test

IEC 61000-4-4

Tested on the following circuits:

EN 60255-22-4

auxiliary power supply

225

Chapter 23 Hardware

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1

CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
Class A, 1KV
Tested on the following circuits:
communication ports

Surge immunity test

IEC 60255-22-5

4.0kV L-E

IEC 61000-4-5

2.0kV L-L
Tested on the following circuits:
auxiliary power supply
CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
500V L-E
Tested on the following circuits:
communication ports

Conduct immunity test

IEC 60255-22-6

Frequency sweep: 150 kHz 80

IEC 61000-4-6

MHz
spot frequencies: 27 MHz and 68
MHz
10 V
AM, 80%, 1 kHz

Power frequency immunity test

IEC60255-22-7

Class A
300 V CM
150 V DM

Power frequency magnetic field test

IEC 61000-4-8

Level 4
30 A/m cont. / 300 A/m 1 s to 3 s

100 kHz burst immunity test

IEC61000-4-18

2.5 kV CM ; 1 kV DM
Tested on the following circuits:
auxiliary power supply
CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
1 kV CM ; 0 kV DM
Tested on the following circuits:
communication ports

Mechanical tests
226

Chapter 23 Hardware

Item
Sinusoidal

Vibration

Standard
response

test

Data

IEC60255-21-1

Class 1

EN 60255-21-1

10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm
60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g
1 sweep cycle in each axis
Relay energized

Sinusoidal Vibration endurance

IEC60255-21-1

Class 1

test

EN 60255-21-1

10 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g
20 sweep cycle in each axis
Relay non-energized

Shock response test

IEC60255-21-2

Class 1

EN 60255-21-2

5 g, 11 ms duration
3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
Relay energized

Shock withstand test

IEC60255-21-2

Class 1

EN 60255-21-2

15 g, 11 ms duration
3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
Relay non-energized

Bump test

IEC60255-21-2

Class 1
10 g, 16 ms duration
1000 shocks in both directions of 3
axes
Relay non-energized

Seismic test

IEC60255-21-3

Class 1
X-axis 1 Hz to 8/9 Hz: 7.5 mm
X-axis 8/9 Hz to 35 Hz :2 g
Y-axis 1 Hz to 8/9 Hz: 3.75 mm
Y-axis 8/9 Hz to 35 Hz :1 g
1 sweep cycle in each axis,
Relay energized

Environmental tests
Item
Recommended permanent operating temperature

Data
-10 C to +55C
(Legibility of display may be impaired above
+55 C /+131 F)

Storage and transport temperature limit

-25C to +70C

227

Chapter 23 Hardware

Permissible humidity

9.2

95 % of relative humidity

IED design
Item

Data

Case size

4U1/2 19inch

Weight

5kg

9.3

CE certificate
Item

EMC Directive
Low voltage directive

228

Data
EN 61000-6-2 and EN61000-6-4 (EMC Council
Directive 2004/108/EC)
EN 60255-27 (Low-voltage directive 2006/95 EC).

Chapter 24 Appendix

Chapter 24 Appendix

About this chapter


This chapter describes the appendix.

229

Chapter 24 Appendix

General setting list

1.1

Setting list for CSC-211 M01


Table 171 Logical linker

Description

Function

Func_OC1

Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2

Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv

Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv

Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1

Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2

Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv

Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault inverse stage

Func_NSOC1

Disable or enable the negative sequence over current stage 1

Func_NSOC2

Disable or enable the negative sequence over current stage 2

Func_NSOC Inv

Disable or enable the negative sequence over current inverse stage

Func_3V01

Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 1

Func_3V02

Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 2

Func_CBF

Disable or enable the circuit breaker function

Func_ThermOL

Disable or enable the thermal overload protection

Func_UV1

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1

Func_UV2

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2

Func_OV1

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1

Func_OV2

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2

Func_LF LS

Disable or enable the low frequency load shedding function

Func_LV LS

Disable or enable the low voltage load shedding function

Func_OL LS

Disable or enable the overload load shedding function

Func_AR

Disable or enable the auto-reclosing function

Func_MC

Disable or enable the manual close function

Func_DZ

Disable or enable the dead zone function

230

Chapter 24 Appendix

Table 172 Setting list

NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

Note

Ctr Word 1

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 2

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 3

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 4

0000~FFFF

AR INITIATION

0000~FFFF

BO1 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO2 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO3 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO7 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

I_OC1

(0.05~20.00)In

In=1A or 5A

T_OC1

0.00~60.00

I_OC2

(0.05~20.00)In

T_OC2

0.00~60.00

U_OC_UnBlk

1.00~120.0

I_OC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

AK_OC Inv

0.001~1000

P_OC Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_OC Inv

0.000~60.00

Angle_OC

0.00~90.00

degree

3I0_EF1

(0.05~20.00)In

T_EF1

0.00~60.00

3I0_EF2

(0.05~20.00)In

T_EF2

0.00~60.00

3I0_EF Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

AK_EF Inv

0.001~1000

P_EF Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_EF Inv

0.000~60.00

Angle_EF

0.00~90.00

degree

Angle_Neg

0.00~90.00

degree

I_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

3I0_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

Ratio I2/I1

0.07~0.50

Ratio I02/I01

0.07~0.50

T2h_Cross_Blk

0.00~60.00

I_SEF1

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

T_SEF1

0.00~60.00

I_SEF2

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

Phase to phase

231

Chapter 24 Appendix

NO.

232

Description

Scope

Unit

T_SEF2

0.00~60.00

I_SEF Inv

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

AK_SEF Inv

0.001~1000

P_SEF Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_SEF Inv

0.000~60.00

Angle_SEF

0.00~90.00

degree

IsCOS_SEF

0.005~1.00

3I2_NSOC1

(0.05~20.00)In

T_NSOC1

0.00~60.00

3I2_NSOC2

(0.05~20.00)In

T_NSOC2

0.00~60.00

3I2_NSOC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

AK_NSOC Inv

0.001~1000

P_NSOC Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_NSOC Inv

0.000~60.00

U_3V01

2.00~100.0

T_3V01

0.00~60.00

U_3V02

2.00~100.0

T_3V02

0.00~60.00

U_Phase low

10.00~100.0

U_Phase up

10.00~100.0

U_UV1

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

T_UV1

0.00~120.0

U_UV2

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

T_UV2

0.00~120.0

Dropout_UV

1.01~2.00

U_OV1

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

T_OV1

0.00~60.00

U_OV2

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

T_OV2

0.00~60.00

Dropout_OV

0.90~0.99

I_Therm OL

0.10~10.00

T_Const Therm

6.0~9999

Ratio_Cool

0.100~10.00

Ratio_Alarm

0.500~1.000

F_LF LS

45.00~60.00

HZ

T_LF LS

0.05~60.00

Note

Chapter 24 Appendix

NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

U_LV LS

50.00~110.0

T_LV LS

0.10~60.00

I_OL LS

0.05~20.00

T_OL LS

0.10~60.00

dF/dt_LS

1.00~10.00

HZ/S

dU/dt_LS

1.00~100.0

V/S

T_3P AR1

0.05~60.00

T_3P AR2

0.05~60.00

T_3P AR3

0.05~60.00

T_3P AR4

0.05~60.00

Times_AR

1.00~4.00

T_Reclaim

0.05~60.00

T_AR Reset

0.05~60.00

T_Max. CB Open

0.05~60.00

T_Syn Chk

0.05~60.00

T_MaxSynExt

0.05~60.00

T_MaxSynReq

0.05~60.00

Phase_UL

1.00~6.00

Angle_Syn Diff

1.00~80.00

Degree

U_Syn Diff

1.00~40.00

Freq_Syn Diff

0.02~2.00

HZ

Umin_Syn

60.00~130.0

Umax_Energ

20.00~100.0

I_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

3I0_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

3I2_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

T_CBF1

0.00~60.00

T_CBF2

0.10~60.00

T_Dead Zone

0.00~60.00

U_Chk

10.00~120.0

I_Chk

(0.00~2.00)In

3I02_ VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

Upe_VT Fail

7.00~20.0

Upp_VT Fail

10.00~30.0

Upe_VT Normal

40.00~65.00

I_VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

3I0_CT Fail

(0.05~2.00)In

T_CB POS

0.10~60.00

T_DS POS

0.10~60.00

T_ES POS

0.10~60.00

T_CB Faulty

0.10~60.00

Ratio_Mea CT

0.001~7.00

Note

233

Chapter 24 Appendix

NO.

Description

Scope

Ratio_VT

0.01~2.00

Unit

Note

Table 173 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit

OC1 Dir Off

OC1 Dir On

OC1 V_Blk Off

C1_V Blk On

OC1 2H_Blk Off

C1 2H_Blk On

OC2 Dir Off

OC2 Dir On

OC2 V_Blk Off

C2 V_Blk On

OC2 2H_Blk Off

C2 2H_Blk On

OC Inv Dir Off

OC Inv Dir On

OCInv 2H_Blk Off

OCInv 2H_Blk On

EF1 Dir Off

EF1 Dir On

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

10

EF2 Dir Off

EF2 Dir On

11

EF2 2H_Blk Off

EF2 2H_Blk On

12

EF Inv Dir Off

EF Inv Dir On

13

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

EFInv 2H_Blk On

14

EF Chk I2/I1

EF Chk I02/I01

15

EF U2/I2 Dir Off

EF U2/I2 Dir On

Table 174 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

234

Bit

SOTF Off

SOTF On

SEF1 Dir Off

SEF1 Dir On

SEF2 Dir Off

SEF2 Dir On

SEF Inv Dir Off

SEF Inv Dir On

SEF Chk Iscos

SEF Chk U0/I0

Therm Alarm Off

Therm Alarm On

Hot Curve

Cold Curve

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

10

Isolate/Resist

Solid earthed

11

Blk EF_CT Fail

UnBlk EF_CT Fail

12

Not used

Not used

13

CT Fail Off

CT Fail On

14

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

Blk Fun_VTFail

15

VT Fail Off

VT Fail On

Chapter 24 Appendix

Table 175 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

Bit

UV Chk CB Off

UV Chk CB On

UV Chk All Phase

UV Chk One Phase

UV PP

UV PE

OV PP

OV PE

dF(dU)/dt Off

dF(dU)/dt On

OL LS Chk V Off

OL LS Chk V On

CBF Chk I0/2 Off

CBF Chk I0/2 On

CBF Chk CB Off

CBF Chk CB On

Selection of AR check mode

9
10
11

Selection of MC check mode

12
13
14

Interlock Off

Interlock On

15

NR SetGrp Switch

BI SetGrp Switch

Table 176 Selection of AR check mode

Bit10

Bit9

Bit8

Mode

AR_Override

AR_Syn check

AR_EnergChkDLLB

AR_EnergChkLLDB

AR_EnergChkDLDB

Not used

Not used

Not used

Table 177 Selection of MC check mode

Bit13

Bit12

Bit11

Mode

MC_Override

MC _Syn check

MC _EnergChkDLLB

MC _EnergChkLLDB

MC _EnergChkDLDB

Not used

Not used

235

Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit13

Bit12

Bit11

Mode

Not used

Table 178 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

Bit

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

NSOC1 Alarm

NSOC1 Trip

NSOC Inv Alarm

NSOC Inv Trip

3V01 Alarm

3V01 Trip

10

3V02 Alarm

3V02 Trip

11

UV1 Alarm

UV1 Trip

12

OV1 Alarm

OV1 Trip

13

CB Faulty Off

CB Faulty On

14

DS Faulty Off

DS Faulty On

15

ES Faulty Off

ES Faulty On

Table 179 Definition of control word AR INITIATION

Bit

OC1 Init AR

Off

OC2 Init AR

Off

OC Inv Init AR

Off

EF1 Init AR

Off

EF2 Init AR

Off

EF Inv Init AR

Off

SEF1 Init AR

Off

SEF2 Init AR

Off

SEF Inv Init AR

Off

NSOC1 Init AR

Off

10

NSOC2 Init AR

Off

11

NSOC Inv Init AR

12~14

Not used

Not used

15

3P Fault Init AR

3P Fault Blk AR

Table 180 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word

236

Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit

Off

OC1&2 Trip

Off

OC Inv Trip

Off

EF1&2 Trip

Off

EF Inv Trip

Off

SEF1&2 Trip

Off

SEF Inv Trip

Off

3V0 Trip

Off

NSOC1&2 Trip

Off

NSOC Inv Trip

Off

Therm OL Trip

10

Off

Load SHED

11

Off

OV1 Trip

12

Off

OV2 Trip

13

Off

UV1 Trip

14

Off

UV2 Trip

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are
defined the same as BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to
different protections. Once a protection is designated to drive BO1, it will
initiate CBF function.

1.2

Setting list for CSC-211 M02

Table7-2 Soft connector

Description

Function

Func_OC1

Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2

Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv

Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv

Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault inverse stage

Func_NSOC1

Disable or enable the negative sequence over current stage 1

237

Chapter 24 Appendix

Description

Function

Func_NSOC2

Disable or enable the negative sequence over current stage 2

Func_NSOC Inv

Disable or enable the negative sequence over current inverse stage

Func_3V01

Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 1

Func_3V02

Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 2

Func_CBF

Disable or enable the circuit breaker function

Func_ThermOL

Disable or enable the thermal overload protection

Func_UV1

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1

Func_UV2

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2

Func_OV1

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1

Func_OV2

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2

Func_MC

Disable or enable the manual close funciton

Func_DZ

Disable or enable the dead zone funciton


Table7-3 Setting list

NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

Note

Ctr Word 1

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 2

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 3

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 4

0000~FFFF

BO1 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO2 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO3 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO7 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

10

BO9 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

11

I_OC1

(0.05~20.00)In

In=1A or 5A

12

T_OC1

0.00~60.00

13

I_OC2

(0.05~20.00)In

14

T_OC2

0.00~60.00

15

U_OC_UnBlk

1.00~120.0

16

Curve_OC Inv

1~12

17

I_OC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

18

K_OC Inv

0.05~999.0

19

A_OC Inv

0.005~200.0

20

B_OC Inv

0.000~60.00

21

P_OC Inv

0.005~10.00

22

Angle_OC

0.00~90.00

degree

23

3I0_EF1

(0.05~20.00)In

238

Phase to phase
Refer to table 7.3.4

Chapter 24 Appendix

24

T_EF1

0.00~60.00

25

3I0_EF2

(0.05~20.00)In

26

T_EF2

0.00~60.00

27

Curve_EF Inv

1~12

28

3I0_EF Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

29

K_EF Inv

0.05~999.0

30

A_EF Inv

0.005~200.0

31

B_EF Inv

0.000~60.00

32

P_EF Inv

0.005~10.00

33

Angle_EF

0.00~90.00

degree

34

Angle_Neg

0.00~90.00

degree

35

I_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

36

3I0_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

37

Ratio I2/I1

0.07~0.50

38

Ratio I02/I01

0.07~0.50

39

T2h_Cross_Blk

0.00~60.00

40

I_SEF1

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

41

T_SEF1

0.00~60.00

42

I_SEF2

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

43

T_SEF2

0.00~60.00

44

Curve_SEF Inv

1~12

45

I_SEF Inv

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

46

K_SEF Inv

0.05~999.0

47

A_SEF Inv

0.005~200.0

48

B_SEF Inv

0.000~60.00

49

P_SEF Inv

0.005~10.00

50

Angle_SEF

0.00~90.00

degree

51

IsCOS_SEF

0.005~1.00

52

U_3V0_SEF

2.00~100.0

53

3I2_NSOC1

(0.05~20.00)In

54

T_NSOC1

0.00~60.00

55

3I2_NSOC2

(0.05~20.00)In

56

T_NSOC2

0.00~60.00

57

Curve_NSOC Inv

1~12

58

3I2_NSOC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

59

K_NSOC Inv

0.05~999.0

60

A_ NSOC Inv

0.005~200.0

61

B_ NSOC Inv

0.000~60.00

62

P_ NSOC Inv

0.005~10.00

63

U_3V01

2.00~100.0

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

239

Chapter 24 Appendix

64

T_3V01

0.00~60.00

65

U_3V02

2.00~100.0

66

T_3V02

0.00~60.00

67

U_Phase low

10.00~100.0

68

U_Phase up

10.00~100.0

69

U_UV1

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

70

T_UV1

0.00~120.0

71

U_UV2

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

72

T_UV2

0.00~120.0

73

Dropout_UV

1.01~2.00

74

U_OV1

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

75

T_OV1

0.00~60.00

76

U_OV2

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

77

T_OV2

0.00~60.00

78

Dropout_OV

0.90~0.99

79

I_Therm OL

0.10~10.00

80

T_Const Therm

6.0~9999

81

Ratio_Cool

0.100~10.00

82

Ratio_Alarm

0.500~1.000

83

T_AR Reset

0.05~60.00

84

T_Syn Chk

0.05~60.00

85

T_MaxSynExt

0.05~60.00

86

T_MaxSynReq

0.05~60.00

87

Phase_UL

1.00~6.00

88

Angle_Syn Diff

1.00~80.00

Degree

89

U_Syn Diff

1.00~40.00

90

Freq_Syn Diff

0.02~2.00

HZ

91

Umin_Syn

30.00~65.0(PE)
60~130.0(PP)

92

Umax_Energ

10~50(PE)
20.00~100.0(PP)

93

I_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

94

3I0_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

95

3I2_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

96

T_CBF1

0.00~60.00

97

T_CBF2

0.10~60.00

98

T_Dead Zone

0.00~60.00

99

U_Chk

10.00~120.0

100

I_Chk

(0.00~2.00)In

240

Chapter 24 Appendix

101

3I02_ VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

102

Upe_VT Fail

7.00~20.0

103

Upp_VT Fail

10.00~30.0

104

Upe_VT Normal

40.00~65.00

105

I_VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

106

3I0_CT Fail

(0.05~2.00)In

107

T_CB POS

0.10~60.00

108

T_DS POS

0.10~60.00

109

T_ES POS

0.10~60.00

110

T_CB Faulty

0.10~60.00

111

Ratio_Mea CT

0.001~7.00

112

Ratio_VT

0.01~2.00
Table7-4 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit

OC1 Dir Off

OC1 Dir On

OC1 V_Blk Off

C1_V Blk On

OC1 2H_Blk Off

C1 2H_Blk On

OC2 Dir Off

OC2 Dir On

OC2 V_Blk Off

C2 V_Blk On

OC2 2H_Blk Off

C2 2H_Blk On

OC Inv Dir Off

OC Inv Dir On

OCInv 2H_Blk Off

OCInv 2H_Blk On

EF1 Dir Off

EF1 Dir On

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

10

EF2 Dir Off

EF2 Dir On

11

EF2 2H_Blk Off

EF2 2H_Blk On

12

EF Inv Dir Off

EF Inv Dir On

13

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

EFInv 2H_Blk On

14

EF Chk I2/I1

EF Chk I02/I01

15

EF U2/I2 Dir Off

EF U2/I2 Dir On

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit

SOTF Off

SOTF On

SEF1 Dir Off

SEF1 Dir On

SEF2 Dir Off

SEF2 Dir On

SEF Inv Dir Off

SEF Inv Dir On

SEF Chk Iscos

SEF Chk U0/I0

Therm Alarm Off

Therm Alarm On

241

Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit

Hot Curve

Cold Curve

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

10

Isolate/Resist

Solid earthed

11

Blk EF_CT Fail

UnBlk EF_CT Fail

12

Not used

Not used

13

CT Fail Off

CT Fail On

14

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

Blk Fun_VTFail

15

VT Fail Off

VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

Bit

UV Chk CB Off

UV Chk CB On

UV Chk All Phase

UV Chk One Phase

UV PP

UV PE

OV PP

OV PE

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

CBF Chk I0/2 Off

CBF Chk I0/2 On

CBF Chk CB Off

CBF Chk CB On

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

10

Not used

Not used

11
Selection of MC check mode

12
13
14

Interlock Off

Interlock On

15

NR SetGrp Switch

BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-10 Selection of MC check mode

242

Bit13

Bit12

Bit11

Mode

MC_Override

MC _Syn check

MC _EnergChkDLLB

MC _EnergChkLLDB

MC _EnergChkDLDB

Not used

Not used

Chapter 24 Appendix

Not used

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

Bit

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

NSOC1 Alarm

NSOC1 Trip

NSOC Inv Alarm

NSOC Inv Trip

3V01 Alarm

3V01 Trip

10

3V02 Alarm

3V02 Trip

11

UV1 Alarm

UV1 Trip

12

OV1 Alarm

OV1 Trip

13

CB Faulty Off

CB Faulty On

14

DS Faulty Off

DS Faulty On

15

ES Faulty Off

ES Faulty On

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word

Bit

Off

OC1&2 Trip

Off

OC Inv Trip

Off

EF1&2 Trip

Off

EF Inv Trip

Off

SEF1&2 Trip

Off

SEF Inv Trip

Off

3V0 Trip

Off

NSOC1&2 Trip

Off

NSOC Inv Trip

Off

Therm OL Trip

10

Not used

Not used

11

Off

OV1 Trip

12

Off

OV2 Trip

13

Off

UV1 Trip

14

Off

UV2 Trip

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are defined the same as

243

Chapter 24 Appendix

BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is
designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

1.3

Setting list for CSC-211 M03


Table7-2 Soft connector

Description

Function

Func_OC1

Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2

Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv

Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv

Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault inverse stage

Func_CBF

Disable or enable the circuit breaker function

Func_UV1

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1

Func_UV2

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2

Func_OV1

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1

Func_OV2

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2

Func_LF LS

Disable or enable the low frequency load shedding function

Func_LV LS

Disable or enable the low voltage load shedding function

Func_OL LS

Disable or enable the over load load shedding function

Func_AR

Disable or enable the auto reclosure funciton

Func_MC

Disable or enable the manual close funciton

Func_DZ

Disable or enable the dead zone funciton


Table7-3 Setting list

NO.

Description

Scope

Ctr Word 1

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 2

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 3

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 4

0000~FFFF

244

Unit

Note

Chapter 24 Appendix

AR INITIATION

0000~FFFF

BO1 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO2 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO3 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

10

BO7 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

11

I_OC1

(0.05~20.00)In

12

T_OC1

0.00~60.00

13

I_OC2

(0.05~20.00)In

14

T_OC2

0.00~60.00

15

U_OC_UnBlk

1.00~120.0

16

Curve_OC Inv

1~12

17

I_OC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

18

K_OC Inv

0.05~999.0

19

A_OC Inv

0.005~200.0

20

B_OC Inv

0.000~60.00

21

P_OC Inv

0.005~10.00

22

Angle_OC

0.00~90.00

degree

23

3I0_EF1

(0.05~20.00)In

24

T_EF1

0.00~60.00

25

3I0_EF2

(0.05~20.00)In

26

T_EF2

0.00~60.00

27

Curve_EF Inv

1~12

28

3I0_EF Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

29

K_EF Inv

0.05~999.0

30

A_EF Inv

0.005~200.0

31

B_EF Inv

0.000~60.00

32

P_EF Inv

0.005~10.00

33

Angle_EF

0.00~90.00

degree

34

Angle_Neg

0.00~90.00

degree

35

I_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

36

3I0_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

37

Ratio I2/I1

0.07~0.50

38

Ratio I02/I01

0.07~0.50

39

T2h_Cross_Blk

0.00~60.00

40

I_SEF1

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

41

T_SEF1

0.00~60.00

42

I_SEF2

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

43

T_SEF2

0.00~60.00

44

Curve_SEF Inv

1~12

45

I_SEF Inv

0.005~1.00(SEF)

In=1A or 5A

Phase to phase
Refer to table 7.3.4

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

245

Chapter 24 Appendix

(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
46

K_SEF Inv

0.05~999.0

47

A_SEF Inv

0.005~200.0

48

B_SEF Inv

0.000~60.00

49

P_SEF Inv

0.005~10.00

50

Angle_SEF

0.00~90.00

degree

51

IsCOS_SEF

0.005~1.00

52

U_3V0_SEF

2.00~100.0

53

U_UV1

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

54

T_UV1

0.00~120.0

55

U_UV2

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

56

T_UV2

0.00~120.0

57

Dropout_UV

1.01~2.00

58

U_OV1

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

59

T_OV1

0.00~60.00

60

U_OV2

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

61

T_OV2

0.00~60.00

62

Dropout_OV

0.90~0.99

63

F_LF LS

45.00~60.00

HZ

64

T_LF LS

0.05~60.00

65

U_LV LS

50.00~110.0

66

T_LV LS

0.10~60.00

67

I_OL LS

0.05~20.00

68

T_OL LS

0.10~60.00

69

dF/dt_LS

1.00~10.00

HZ/S

70

dU/dt_LS

1.00~100.0

V/S

71

T_3P AR1

0.05~60.00

72

T_3P AR2

0.05~60.00

73

T_3P AR3

0.05~60.00

74

T_3P AR4

0.05~60.00

75

Times_AR

1.00~4.00

76

T_Reclaim

0.05~60.00

77

T_AR Reset

0.05~60.00

78

T_Max. CB Open

0.05~60.00

79

T_Syn Chk

0.05~60.00

80

T_MaxSynExt

0.05~60.00

81

T_MaxSynReq

0.05~60.00

82

Phase_UL

1.00~6.00

83

Angle_Syn Diff

1.00~80.00

246

Degree

Chapter 24 Appendix

84

U_Syn Diff

1.00~40.00

85

Freq_Syn Diff

0.02~2.00

HZ

86

Umin_Syn

30.00~65.0(PE)
60~130.0(PP)

87

Umax_Energ

10~50(PE)
20.00~100.0(PP)

88

I_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

89

3I0_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

90

3I2_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

91

T_CBF1

0.00~60.00

92

T_CBF2

0.10~60.00

93

T_Dead Zone

0.00~60.00

94

U_Chk

10.00~120.0

95

I_Chk

(0.00~2.00)In

96

3I02_ VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

97

Upe_VT Fail

7.00~20.0

98

Upp_VT Fail

10.00~30.0

99

Upe_VT Normal

40.00~65.00

100

I_VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

101

3I0_CT Fail

(0.05~2.00)In

102

T_CB POS

0.10~60.00

103

T_DS POS

0.10~60.00

104

T_ES POS

0.10~60.00

105

T_CB Faulty

0.10~60.00

106

Ratio_Mea CT

0.001~7.00

107

Ratio_VT

0.01~2.00
Table7-4 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit

OC1 Dir Off

OC1 Dir On

OC1 V_Blk Off

C1_V Blk On

OC1 2H_Blk Off

C1 2H_Blk On

OC2 Dir Off

OC2 Dir On

OC2 V_Blk Off

C2 V_Blk On

OC2 2H_Blk Off

C2 2H_Blk On

OC Inv Dir Off

OC Inv Dir On

OCInv 2H_Blk Off

OCInv 2H_Blk On

EF1 Dir Off

EF1 Dir On

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

10

EF2 Dir Off

EF2 Dir On

11

EF2 2H_Blk Off

EF2 2H_Blk On

12

EF Inv Dir Off

EF Inv Dir On

247

Chapter 24 Appendix

13

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

EFInv 2H_Blk On

14

EF Chk I2/I1

EF Chk I02/I01

15

EF U2/I2 Dir Off

EF U2/I2 Dir On

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit

SOTF Off

SOTF On

SEF1 Dir Off

SEF1 Dir On

SEF2 Dir Off

SEF2 Dir On

SEF Inv Dir Off

SEF Inv Dir On

SEF Chk Iscos

SEF Chk U0/I0

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

10

Isolate/Resist

Solid earthed

11

Blk EF_CT Fail

UnBlk EF_CT Fail

12

Not used

Not used

13

CT Fail Off

CT Fail On

14

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

Blk Fun_VTFail

15

VT Fail Off

VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

Bit

UV Chk CB Off

UV Chk CB On

UV Chk All Phase

UV Chk One Phase

UV PP

UV PE

OV PP

OV PE

dF(dU)/dt Off

dF(dU)/dt On

OL LS Chk V Off

OL LS Chk V On

CBF Chk I0/2 Off

CBF Chk I0/2 On

CBF Chk CB Off

CBF Chk CB On

Selection of AR check mode

9
10
11
12
13

248

Selection of MC check mode

Chapter 24 Appendix

14

Interlock Off

Interlock On

15

NR SetGrp Switch

BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-6 Selection of AR check mode

Bit10

Bit9

Bit8

Mode

AR_Override

AR_Syn check

AR_EnergChkDLLB

AR_EnergChkLLDB

AR_EnergChkDLDB

Not used

Not used

Not used

Table7-10 Selection of MC check mode

Bit13

Bit12

Bit11

Mode

MC_Override

MC _Syn check

MC _EnergChkDLLB

MC _EnergChkLLDB

MC _EnergChkDLDB

Not used

Not used

Not used

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

Bit

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

10

Not used

Not used

11

UV1 Alarm

UV1 Trip

12

OV1 Alarm

OV1 Trip

249

Chapter 24 Appendix

13

CB Faulty Off

CB Faulty On

14

DS Faulty Off

DS Faulty On

15

ES Faulty Off

ES Faulty On

Table7-13 Definition of control word AR INITIATION

Bit

OC1 Init AR

Off

OC2 Init AR

Off

OC Inv Init AR

Off

EF1 Init AR

Off

EF2 Init AR

Off

EF Inv Init AR

Off

SEF1 Init AR

Off

SEF2 Init AR

Off

SEF Inv Init AR

Off

Not used

Not used

10

Not used

Not used

11

Not used

Not used

12~14

Not used

Not used

15

3P Fault Init AR

3P Fault Blk AR

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word

Bit

Off

OC1&2 Trip

Off

OC Inv Trip

Off

EF1&2 Trip

Off

EF Inv Trip

Off

SEF1&2 Trip

Off

SEF Inv Trip

6~9

Not used

Not used

10

Off

Load SHED

11

Off

OV1 Trip

12

Off

OV2 Trip

13

Off

UV1 Trip

14

Off

UV2 Trip

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are defined the same as
BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is
designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

1.4
250

Setting list for CSC-211 M05

Chapter 24 Appendix

Table7-2 Soft connector

Description

Function

Func_OC1

Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2

Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv

Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv

Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault inverse stage

Func_LF LS

Disable or enable the low frequency load shedding function

Func_LV LS

Disable or enable the low voltage load shedding function

Func_OL LS

Disable or enable the over load load shedding function

Func_AR

Disable or enable the auto reclosure funciton

Table7-3 Setting list

NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

Note

108

Ctr Word 1

0000~FFFF

109

Ctr Word 2

0000~FFFF

110

Ctr Word 3

0000~FFFF

111

Ctr Word 4

0000~FFFF

112

AR INITIATION

0000~FFFF

113

BO1 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

114

BO2 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

115

BO3 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

116

BO4 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

117

BO5 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

118

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

119

BO7 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

120

BO8 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

121

I_OC1

(0.05~20.00)In

In=1A or 5A

122

T_OC1

0.00~60.00

123

I_OC2

(0.05~20.00)In

124

T_OC2

0.00~60.00

125

Curve_OC Inv

1~12

126

I_OC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

127

K_OC Inv

0.05~999.0

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

251

Chapter 24 Appendix

128

A_OC Inv

0.005~200.0

129

B_OC Inv

0.000~60.00

130

P_OC Inv

0.005~10.00

131

3I0_EF1

(0.05~20.00)In

132

T_EF1

0.00~60.00

133

3I0_EF2

(0.05~20.00)In

134

T_EF2

0.00~60.00

135

Curve_EF Inv

1~12

136

3I0_EF Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

137

K_EF Inv

0.05~999.0

138

A_EF Inv

0.005~200.0

139

B_EF Inv

0.000~60.00

140

P_EF Inv

0.005~10.00

141

I_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

142

3I0_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

143

Ratio I2/I1

0.07~0.50

144

Ratio I02/I01

0.07~0.50

145

T2h_Cross_Blk

0.00~60.00

146

I_SEF1

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

147

T_SEF1

0.00~60.00

148

I_SEF2

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

149

T_SEF2

0.00~60.00

150

Curve_SEF Inv

1~12

151

I_SEF Inv

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

152

K_SEF Inv

0.05~999.0

153

A_SEF Inv

0.005~200.0

154

B_SEF Inv

0.000~60.00

155

P_SEF Inv

0.005~10.00

156

F_LF LS

45.00~60.00

HZ

157

T_LF LS

0.05~60.00

158

U_LV LS

50.00~110.0

159

T_LV LS

0.10~60.00

160

I_OL LS

0.05~20.00

161

T_OL LS

0.10~60.00

162

dF/dt_LS

1.00~10.00

HZ/S

163

dU/dt_LS

1.00~100.0

V/S

164

T_3P AR1

0.05~60.00

165

T_3P AR2

0.05~60.00

166

T_3P AR3

0.05~60.00

167

T_3P AR4

0.05~60.00

252

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

Chapter 24 Appendix

168

Times_AR

1.00~4.00

169

T_Reclaim

0.05~60.00

170

T_AR Reset

0.05~60.00

171

T_Max. CB Open

0.05~60.00

172

U_Chk

10.00~120.0

173

I_Chk

(0.00~2.00)In

174

3I02_ VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

175

Upe_VT Fail

7.00~20.0

176

Upp_VT Fail

10.00~30.0

177

Upe_VT Normal

40.00~65.00

178

I_VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

179

3I0_CT Fail

(0.05~2.00)In

180

T_CB POS

0.10~60.00

181

T_DS POS

0.10~60.00

182

T_ES POS

0.10~60.00

183

T_CB Faulty

0.10~60.00

184

Ratio_Mea CT

0.001~7.00

185

Ratio_VT

0.01~2.00
Table7-4 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit

OC1 2H_Blk Off

C1 2H_Blk On

OC2 2H_Blk Off

C2 2H_Blk On

OCInv 2H_Blk Off

OCInv 2H_Blk On

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

11

EF2 2H_Blk Off

EF2 2H_Blk On

13

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

EFInv 2H_Blk On

14

EF Chk I2/I1

EF Chk I02/I01

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit

SOTF Off

SOTF On

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

Not used

Not used

253

Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

10

Isolate/Resist

Solid earthed

11

Blk EF_CT Fail

UnBlk EF_CT Fail

12

Not used

Not used

13

CT Fail Off

CT Fail On

14

Not used

Not used

15

VT Fail Off

VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

Bit

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

dF(dU)/dt Off

dF(dU)/dt On

OL LS Chk V Off

OL LS Chk V On

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

14

Interlock Off

Interlock On

15

NR SetGrp Switch

BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

254

Bit

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

10

Not used

Not used

11

Not used

Not used

12

Not used

Not used

13

CB Faulty Off

CB Faulty On

14

DS Faulty Off

DS Faulty On

15

ES Faulty Off

ES Faulty On

Chapter 24 Appendix

Table7-13 Definition of control word AR INITIATION

Bit

OC1 Init AR

Off

OC2 Init AR

Off

OC Inv Init AR

Off

EF1 Init AR

Off

EF2 Init AR

Off

EF Inv Init AR

Off

SEF1 Init AR

Off

SEF2 Init AR

Off

SEF Inv Init AR

Off

Not used

Not used

10

Not used

Not used

11

Not used

Not used

12~14

Not used

Not used

15

3P Fault Init AR

3P Fault Blk AR

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word

Bit

Off

OC1&2 Trip

Off

OC Inv Trip

Off

EF1&2 Trip

Off

EF Inv Trip

Off

SEF1&2 Trip

Off

SEF Inv Trip

Not used

Not used

10

Off

Load SHED

11

Not used

Not used

12

Not used

Not used

13

Not used

Not used

14

Not used

Not used

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO4 Ctr Word, BO5 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr
Word ,BO8 Ctr Wordare defined the same as BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed
to different protections. Once a protection is designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

1.5

Setting list for CSC-211 M6


Table 181 logical linker

255

Chapter 24 Appendix

Description

Function

Func_OC1

Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2

Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv

Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv

Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2

Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv

Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault inverse stage

Table 182 Setting list


NO.

256

Description

Scope

Unit

Ctr Word 1

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 2

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 3

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 4

0000~FFFF

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO7 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO8 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO9 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

I_OC1

(0.05~20.00)In

T_OC1

0.00~60.00

I_OC2

(0.05~20.00)In

T_OC2

0.00~60.00

I_OC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

AK_OC Inv

0.001~1000

P_OC Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_OC Inv

0.000~60.00

3I0_EF1

(0.05~20.00)In

T_EF1

0.00~60.00

3I0_EF2

(0.05~20.00)In

T_EF2

0.00~60.00

3I0_EF Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

AK_EF Inv

0.001~1000

P_EF Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_EF Inv

0.000~60.00

I_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

3I0_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

Note

In=1A or 5A

Chapter 24 Appendix

NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

Ratio I2/I1

0.07~0.50

Ratio I02/I01

0.07~0.50

T2h_Cross_Blk

0.00~60.00

I_SEF1

0.005~1.00(SEF)

Note

(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF1

0.00~60.00

I_SEF2

0.005~1.00(SEF)

(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF2

0.00~60.00

I_SEF Inv

0.005~1.00(SEF)

(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
AK_SEF Inv

0.001~1000

P_SEF Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_SEF Inv

0.000~60.00

3I0_CT Fail

(0.05~2.00)In

T_CB POS

0.10~60.00

T_DS POS

0.10~60.00

T_ES POS

0.10~60.00

Ratio_Mea CT

0.001~7.00

Ratio_VT

0.01~2.00
Table 183 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit

0~1

Not used

Not used

OC1 2H_Blk Off

C1 2H_Blk On

3~4

Not used

Not used

OC2 2H_Blk Off

C2 2H_Blk On

Not used

Not used

OCInv 2H_Blk Off

OCInv 2H_Blk On

Not used

Not used

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

10

Not used

Not used

11

EF2 2H_Blk Off

EF2 2H_Blk On

12

Not used

Not used

13

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

EFInv 2H_Blk On

14

EF Chk I2/I1

EF Chk I02/I01

15

Not used

Not used

Table 184 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

257

Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit

SOTF Off

SOTF On

1~6

Not used

Not used

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

8~10

Not used

Not used

11

Blk EF_CT Fail

UnBlk EF_CT Fail

12

Not used

Not used

13

CT Fail Off

CT Fail On

14~15

Not used

Not used

Table 185 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3


Bit

0~13

Not used

Not used

14

Interlock Off

Interlock On

15

NR SetGrp Switch

BI SetGrp Switch

Table 186 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4


Bit

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

7~12

Not used

Not used

13

CB Faulty Off

CB Faulty On

14

DS Faulty Off

DS Faulty On

15

ES Faulty Off

ES Faulty On

Table 187 Definition of control word BO6 Ctr Word

258

Bit

Off

OC1&2 Trip

Off

OC Inv Trip

Off

EF1&2 Trip

Off

EF Inv Trip

Off

SEF1&2 Trip

Off

SEF Inv Trip

Chapter 24 Appendix

Note: BO7 Ctr Word, BO8 Ctr Word, BO9 Ctr Word are defined the same
as BO6 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different
protections. Once a protection is designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF
function.

1.6

Setting list for CSC-211 V01


Table7-2 Soft connector

Description

Function

Func_3V01

Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 1

Func_3V02

Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 2

Func_UV1

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1

Func_UV2

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2

Func_OV1

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1

Func_OV2

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2


Table7-3 Setting list

NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

Ctr Word 1

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 2

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 3

0000~FFFF

BO1 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO2 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO3 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO4 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO5 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

10

BO7 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

11

BO8Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

12

BO9 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

13

U_3V01

2.00~100.0

14

T_3V01

0.00~60.00

15

U_3V02

2.00~100.0

16

T_3V02

0.00~60.00

17

U_Phase low

10.00~100.0

18

U_Phase up

10.00~100.0

19

U_UV1

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

20

T_UV1

0.00~120.0

21

U_UV2

5.00~75.0(PE)

Note

259

Chapter 24 Appendix

10.00~150.0(PP)
22

T_UV2

0.00~120.0

23

Dropout_UV

1.01~2.00

24

U_OV1

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

25

T_OV1

0.00~60.00

26

U_OV2

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

27

T_OV2

0.00~60.00

28

Dropout_OV

0.90~0.99

29

Upe_VT Fail

7.00~20.0

30

Upp_VT Fail

10.00~30.0

31

Upe_VT Normal

40.00~65.00

32

Ratio_VT

0.01~2.00
Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

10

Isolate/Resist

Solid earthed

11

VT Chk CB Off

VT Chk CB On

12

Not used

Not used

13

Not used

Not used

14

Not used

Not used

15

VT Fail Off

VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

260

Bit

UV Chk CB Off

UV Chk CB On

UV Chk All Phase

UV Chk One Phase

UV PP

UV PE

OV PP

OV PE

Chapter 24 Appendix

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

9
10
11
12

Not used

13
14

Not used

Not used

15

NR SetGrp Switch

BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

Bit

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

3V01 Alarm

3V01 Trip

10

3V02 Alarm

3V02 Trip

11

UV1 Alarm

UV1 Trip

12

OV1 Alarm

OV1 Trip

13

Not used

Not used

14

Not used

Not used

15

Not used

Not used

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word

Bit

Off

OC1&2 Trip

Off

OC Inv Trip

Off

EF1&2 Trip

Off

EF Inv Trip

Off

SEF1&2 Trip

261

Chapter 24 Appendix

Off

SEF Inv Trip

Off

3V0 Trip

6~10

Not used

Not used

11

Off

OV1 Trip

12

Off

OV2 Trip

13

Off

UV1 Trip

14

Off

UV2 Trip

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are defined the same as
BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is
designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function

1.7

Setting list for CSC-211 C01


Table 188 Soft connector

Name
Func_OC1

Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2

Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv

Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv

Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1

Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2

Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv

262

Function

Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault inverse stage

Func_3V01

Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 1

Func_3V02

Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 2

Func_CBF

Disable or enable the circuit breaker function

Func_UV1

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1

Func_UV2

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2

Func_OV1

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1

Func_OV2

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2

Func_UBL

Disable or enable the unbalance function

Func_OL

Disable or enable the over load function

Func_UC

Disable or enable the under current function

Chapter 24 Appendix

Name

Function

Func_DZ

Disable or enable the dead zone function

Table 189 Setting list


NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

Note

Ctr Word 1

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 2

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 3

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 4

0000~FFFF

BO1 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO2 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO3 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO3 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

I_OC1

(0.05~20.00)In

In=1A or 5A

T_OC1

0.00~60.00

I_OC2

(0.05~20.00)In

T_OC2

0.00~60.00

U_OC_UnBlk

1.00~120.0

I_OC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

AK_OC Inv

0.001~1000

P_OC Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_OC Inv

0.000~60.00

Angle_OC

0.00~90.00

degree

3I0_EF1

(0.05~20.00)In

T_EF1

0.00~60.00

3I0_EF2

(0.05~20.00)In

T_EF2

0.00~60.00

3I0_EF Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

AK_EF Inv

0.001~1000

P_EF Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_EF Inv

0.000~60.00

Angle_EF

0.00~90.00

degree

Angle_Neg

0.00~90.00

degree

I_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

3I0_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

Ratio I2/I1

0.07~0.50

Ratio I02/I01

0.07~0.50

T2h_Cross_Blk

0.00~60.00

I_SEF1

0.005~1.00(SEF)

Phase to phase

263

Chapter 24 Appendix

NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF1

0.00~60.00

I_SEF2

0.005~1.00(SEF)

(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF2

0.00~60.00

I_SEF Inv

0.005~1.00(SEF)

(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
AK_SEF Inv

0.001~1000

P_SEF Inv

0.01~10.00

BK_SEF Inv

0.000~60.00

Angle_SEF

0.00~90.00

degree

IsCOS_SEF

0.005~1.00

I_OL Alarm

(0.05~20.00)In

T_OL Alarm

0.10~6000.0

I_OL Trip

(0.05~20.00)In

T_OL Trip

0.10~6000.0

I_UC

(0.05~20.00)In

T_UC

0.100~60.00

T_Inhibition

30.00~6000.0

U_UBL Alarm

0.50~100.0

T_UBL Alarm

0.10~60.00

U_UBL Trip

0.50~100.0

T_UBL Trip

0.00~60.00

U_3V01

2.00~100.0

T_3V01

0.00~60.00

U_3V02

2.00~100.0

T_3V02

0.00~60.00

U_Phase low

10.00~100.0

U_Phase up

10.00~100.0

U_UV1

5.00~75.0(PE)

10.00~150.0(PP)
T_UV1

0.00~120.0

U_UV2

5.00~75.0(PE)

10.00~150.0(PP)
T_UV2

0.00~120.0

Dropout_UV

1.01~2.00

U_OV1

40.00~100.0(PE)

S
V

80.00~200.0(PP)
T_OV1

0.00~60.00

U_OV2

40.00~100.0(PE)

80.00~200.0(PP)
T_OV2

264

0.00~60.00

Note

Chapter 24 Appendix

NO.

Description

Scope

Unit

Dropout_OV

0.90~0.99

I_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

3I0_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

3I2_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

T_CBF1

0.00~60.00

T_CBF2

0.10~60.00

T_Dead Zone

0.00~60.00

I_Chk

(0.00~2.00)In

3I02_ VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

Upe_VT Fail

7.00~20.0

Upp_VT Fail

10.00~30.0

Upe_VT Normal

40.00~65.00

I_VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

3I0_CT Fail

(0.05~2.00)In

T_CB POS

0.10~60.00

T_DS POS

0.10~60.00

T_ES POS

0.10~60.00

T_CB Faulty

0.10~60.00

Ratio_Mea CT

0.001~7.00

Ratio_VT

0.01~2.00

Note

Table 190 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1


Bit

OC1 Dir Off

OC1 Dir On

OC1 V_Blk Off

C1_V Blk On

OC1 2H_Blk Off

C1 2H_Blk On

OC2 Dir Off

OC2 Dir On

OC2 V_Blk Off

C2 V_Blk On

OC2 2H_Blk Off

C2 2H_Blk On

OC Inv Dir Off

OC Inv Dir On

OCInv 2H_Blk Off

OCInv 2H_Blk On

EF1 Dir Off

EF1 Dir On

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

10

EF2 Dir Off

EF2 Dir On

11

EF2 2H_Blk Off

EF2 2H_Blk On

12

EF Inv Dir Off

EF Inv Dir On

13

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

EFInv 2H_Blk On

14

EF Chk I2/I1

EF Chk I02/I01

15

EF U2/I2 Dir Off

EF U2/I2 Dir On

265

Chapter 24 Appendix

Table 191 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2


Bit

Not used

Not used

SEF1 Dir Off

SEF1 Dir On

SEF2 Dir Off

SEF2 Dir On

SEF Inv Dir Off

SEF Inv Dir On

SEF Chk Iscos

SEF Chk U0/I0

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

10

Isolate/Resist

Solid earthed

11

Blk EF_CT Fail

UnBlk EF_CT Fail

12

Not used

Not used

13

CT Fail Off

CT Fail On

14

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

Blk Fun_VTFail

15

VT Fail Off

VT Fail On

Table 192 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3


Bit

UV Chk CB Off

UV Chk CB On

UV Chk All Phase

UV Chk One Phase

UV PP

UV PE

OV PP

OV PE

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

CBF Chk I0/2 Off

CBF Chk I0/2 On

CBF Chk CB Off

CBF Chk CB On

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

10

Not used

Not used

11

Not used

Not used

12

Not used

Not used

13

Not used

Not used

14

Interlock Off

Interlock On

15

NR SetGrp Switch

BI SetGrp Switch

Table 193 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

266

Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

OL Alarm Off

OL Alarm On

UBL Alarm Off

UBL Alarm On

3V01 Alarm

3V01 Trip

10

3V02 Alarm

3V02 Trip

11

UV1 Alarm

UV1 Trip

12

OV1 Alarm

OV1 Trip

13

CB Faulty Off

CB Faulty On

14

DS Faulty Off

DS Faulty On

15

ES Faulty Off

ES Faulty On

Table 194 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word


Bit

Off

OC1&2 Trip

Off

OC Inv Trip

Off

EF1&2 Trip

Off

EF Inv Trip

Off

SEF1&2 Trip

Off

SEF Inv Trip

Off

OL Trip

Off

UC

Off

UV Trip

Off

OL Trip

10

Off

OV1 Trip

11

Off

OV2 Trip

12

Off

UV1 Trip

13

Off

UV2 Trip

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word ,
BO9 Ctr Word are defined the same as BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs
can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is designated to
drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

267

Chapter 24 Appendix

1.8

Setting list for CSC-211 C02


Table7-2 Soft connector

Description

Function

Func_OC1

Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2

Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv

Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2

Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv

Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv

Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault inverse stage

Func_3V01

Disable or enable the displacement voltage protection stage 1

Func_3V01

Disable or enable the displacement voltage protection stage 1

Func_CBF

Disable or enable the circuit breaker function

Func_UV1

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1

Func_UV2

Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2

Func_OV1

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1

Func_OV2

Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2

Func_UBL

Disable or enable unbalance detection function

Func_OL

Disable or enable the over load function

Func_UC

Disable or enable under current function

Func_DZ

Disable or enable the dead zone funciton


Table7-3 Setting list

NO.

Description

Scope

Ctr Word 1

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 2

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 3

0000~FFFF

Ctr Word 4

0000~FFFF

BO1 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO2 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO3 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO6 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

BO7 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

268

Unit

Note

Chapter 24 Appendix

10

BO9 Ctr Word

0000~FFFF

11

I_OC1

(0.05~20.00)In

12

T_OC1

0.00~60.00

13

I_OC2

(0.05~20.00)In

14

T_OC2

0.00~60.00

15

U_OC_UnBlk

1.00~120.0

16

Curve_OC Inv

1~12

17

I_OC Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

18

K_OC Inv

0.05~999.0

19

A_OC Inv

0.005~200.0

20

B_OC Inv

0.000~60.00

21

P_OC Inv

0.005~10.00

22

Angle_OC

0.00~90.00

degree

23

3I0_EF1

(0.05~20.00)In

24

T_EF1

0.00~60.00

25

3I0_EF2

(0.05~20.00)In

26

T_EF2

0.00~60.00

27

Curve_EF Inv

1~12

28

3I0_EF Inv

(0.05~20.00)In

29

K_EF Inv

0.05~999.0

30

A_EF Inv

0.005~200.0

31

B_EF Inv

0.000~60.00

32

P_EF Inv

0.005~10.00

33

Angle_EF

0.00~90.00

degree

34

Angle_Neg

0.00~90.00

degree

35

I_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

36

3I0_2H_UnBlk

(0.25~20.00)In

37

Ratio I2/I1

0.07~0.50

38

Ratio I02/I01

0.07~0.50

39

T2h_Cross_Blk

0.00~60.00

40

I_SEF1

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

41

T_SEF1

0.00~60.00

42

I_SEF2

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

43

T_SEF2

0.00~60.00

44

Curve_SEF Inv

1~12

45

I_SEF Inv

0.005~1.00(SEF)
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)

46

K_SEF Inv

0.05~999.0

47

A_SEF Inv

0.005~200.0

48

B_SEF Inv

0.000~60.00

49

P_SEF Inv

0.005~10.00

In=1A or 5A

Phase to phase
Refer to table 7.3.4

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

Refer to table 7.3.4


A

269

Chapter 24 Appendix

50

Angle_SEF

0.00~90.00

degree

51

IsCOS_SEF

0.005~1.00

52

U_3V0_SEF

2.00~100.0

53

I_OL_Alarm

(0.05~20.00)In

54

T_ OL_Alarm

0.100~6000.0

55

I_OL_Trip

(0.05~20.00)In

56

T_ OL_Trip

0.100~6000.0

57

I_UC

(0.05~20.00)In

58

T_UC

0.100~60.0

59

T_Inhibition

30.000~6000.0

60

I_UBL_Alarm

0.050~20.00

61

T_UBL_Alarm

0.100~60.00

62

I_UBL_Trip

0.050~20.00

63

T_UBL_Trip

0.100~60.00

64

U_3V01

2.00~100.0

65

T_3V01

0.00~60.00

66

U_3V02

2.00~100.0

67

T_3V02

0.00~60.00

68

U_Phase low

10.00~100.0

69

U_Phase up

10.00~100.0

70

U_UV1

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

71

T_UV1

0.00~120.0

72

U_UV2

5.00~75.0(PE)
10.00~150.0(PP)

73

T_UV2

0.00~120.0

74

Dropout_UV

1.01~2.00

75

U_OV1

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

76

T_OV1

0.00~60.00

77

U_OV2

40.00~100.0(PE)
80.00~200.0(PP)

78

T_OV2

0.00~60.00

79

Dropout_OV

0.90~0.99

80

I_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

81

3I0_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

82

3I2_CBF

(0.05~20.00)In

83

T_CBF1

0.00~60.00

84

T_CBF2

0.10~60.00

85

T_Dead Zone

0.00~60.00

86

I_Chk

(0.00~2.00)In

87

3I02_ VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

88

Upe_VT Fail

7.00~20.0

270

Chapter 24 Appendix

89

Upp_VT Fail

10.00~30.0

90

Upe_VT Normal

40.00~65.00

91

I_VT Fail

(0.05~0.25)In

92

3I0_CT Fail

(0.05~2.00)In

93

T_CB POS

0.10~60.00

94

T_DS POS

0.10~60.00

95

T_ES POS

0.10~60.00

96

T_CB Faulty

0.10~60.00

97

Ratio_Mea CT

0.001~7.00

98

Ratio_VT

0.01~2.00
Table7-4 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit

OC1 Dir Off

OC1 Dir On

OC1 V_Blk Off

C1_V Blk On

OC1 2H_Blk Off

C1 2H_Blk On

OC2 Dir Off

OC2 Dir On

OC2 V_Blk Off

C2 V_Blk On

OC2 2H_Blk Off

C2 2H_Blk On

OC Inv Dir Off

OC Inv Dir On

OCInv 2H_Blk Off

OCInv 2H_Blk On

EF1 Dir Off

EF1 Dir On

EF1 2H_Blk Off

EF1 2H_Blk On

10

EF2 Dir Off

EF2 Dir On

11

EF2 2H_Blk Off

EF2 2H_Blk On

12

EF Inv Dir Off

EF Inv Dir On

13

EFInv 2H_Blk Off

EFInv 2H_Blk On

14

EF Chk I2/I1

EF Chk I02/I01

15

EF U2/I2 Dir Off

EF U2/I2 Dir On

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit

Not used

Not used

SEF1 Dir Off

SEF1 Dir On

SEF2 Dir Off

SEF2 Dir On

SEF Inv Dir Off

SEF Inv Dir On

SEF Chk Iscos

SEF Chk U0/I0

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

3I0 Measured

3I0 Calculated

271

Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit

3U0 Measured

3U0 Calculated

3Ph V Connect

1Ph V Connect

10

Isolate/Resist

Solid earthed

11

Blk EF_CT Fail

UnBlk EF_CT Fail

12

Not used

Not used

13

CT Fail Off

CT Fail On

14

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

Blk Fun_VTFail

15

VT Fail Off

VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

Bit

UV Chk CB Off

UV Chk CB On

UV Chk All Phase

UV Chk One Phase

UV PP

UV PE

OV PP

OV PE

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

CBF Chk I0/2 Off

CBF Chk I0/2 On

CBF Chk CB Off

CBF Chk CB On

Not used

9
10
11

Not used

12
13
14

Interlock Off

Interlock On

15

NR SetGrp Switch

BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

272

Bit

OC1 Alarm

OC1 Trip

OC Inv Alarm

OC Inv Trip

EF1 Alarm

EF1 Trip

EF Inv Alarm

EF Inv Trip

SEF1 Alarm

SEF1 Trip

SEF2 Alarm

SEF2 Trip

SEF Inv Alarm

SEF Inv Trip

OL Alarm Off

OL Alarm On

UBL Alarm Off

UBL Alarm On

Chapter 24 Appendix

3V01 Alarm

3V01 Trip

10

3V01 Alarm

3V01 Trip

11

UV1 Alarm

UV1 Trip

12

OV1 Alarm

OV1 Trip

13

CB Faulty Off

CB Faulty On

14

DS Faulty Off

DS Faulty On

15

ES Faulty Off

ES Faulty On

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word

Bit

Off

OC1&2 Trip

Off

OC Inv Trip

Off

EF1&2 Trip

Off

EF Inv Trip

Off

SEF1&2 Trip

Off

SEF Inv Trip

Off

3V0 Trip

Off

UC

Off

UBL Trip

Off

OL Trip

10

Off

OV1 Trip

11

Off

OV2 Trip

12

Off

UV1 Trip

13

Off

UV2 Trip

14
Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are defined the same as
BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is
designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

273

Chapter 24 Appendix

274

Chapter 24 Appendix

General report list

2.1

Event report list


Table 195 Event report list for CSC-211 M1

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

Startup

Protection startup

OC1 Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues trip command

OC2 Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 2 issues trip command

OC Inv Trip

Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues trip command

EF1 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command

EF2 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command

EF Inv Trip

Earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command

Inrush Blk

Inrush current is checked to block function.

9
10
11

NSOC1 Trip
NSOC2 Trip
NSOC Inv Trip

Negative sequence current protection stage 1 issues trip


command
Negative sequence current protection stage 2 issues trip
command
Negative sequence current protection inverse stage issues trip
command

12

SEF1 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command

13

SEF2 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command

14

SEF Inv Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip


command

15

3V01 Trip

Displacement voltage protection stage 1 issues trip command

16

3V02 Trip

Displacement voltage protection stage 2 issues trip command

17

UV1 Trip

Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command

18

UV2 Trip

Undervoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command

19

OV1 Trip

Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command

20

OV2 Trip

Overvoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command

21

Therm OL Trip

Thermal overload protection issues trip command

22

LF LS Trip

Low frequency load shedding function issues trip command

23

LV LS Trip

Low voltage load shedding function issues trip command

24

OL LS Trip

Overload load shedding function issues trip command

25

1st Reclose

The first shot reclosing

26

2nd Reclose

The second shot reclosing

27

3rd Reclose

The third shot reclosing

28

4th Reclose

The fourth shot reclosing

29

AR in progress

AR is initiated by internal or external function

30

Syn Request

Synchronization check

275

Chapter 24 Appendix

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

31

Syn Ok

Answer to AR to check synchronization successfully

32

AR Success

AR successful

33

Syn Failure

Fail to check synchronization in limited duration

34

AR Failure

AR unsuccessful

35

Syn Vdiff fail

Voltage difference checking fail

36

Syn Ang fail

Angle difference checking fail

37

Syn Fdiff fail

Frequency difference checking fail

38

CBF Initiate

CBF function is initiated

39

CBF1 Trip

The first stage CBF issues trip command

40

CBF2 Trip

The second stage CBF issues trip command

41

Dead Zone Trip

The dead zone function issues trip command

42

OC Startup

Three stages overcurrent protections startup

43

OC Startup Back

Three stages overcurrent protections return


Table 196 Event report list for CSC-211 M6

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

Startup

Protection startup

OC1 Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues trip command

OC2 Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 2 issues trip command

OC Inv Trip

Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues trip command

EF1 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command

EF2 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command

EF Inv Trip

Earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command

Inrush Blk

Inrush current is checked to block function.

SEF1 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command

10

SEF2 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command

11

Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip

SEF Inv Trip

command

12

OC Startup

Three stages overcurrent protections startup

13

OC Startup Back

Three stages overcurrent protections return


Table 197 Event report list for CSC-211 C1

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

Startup

Protection startup

OC1 Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues trip command

OC2 Trip

Overcurrent protection stage 2 issues trip command

OC Inv Trip

Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues trip command

EF1 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command

EF2 Trip

Earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command

EF Inv Trip

Earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command

276

Chapter 24 Appendix

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

Inrush Blk

Inrush current is checked to block function.

SEF1 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command

10

SEF2 Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command

11

SEF Inv Trip

Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip


command

12

3V01 Trip

Displacement voltage protection stage 1 issues trip command

13

3V02 Trip

Displacement voltage protection stage 2 issues trip command

14

UV1 Trip

Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command

15

UV2 Trip

Undervoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command

16

OV1 Trip

Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command

17

OV2 Trip

Overvoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command

18

UBL Trip

Unbalance protection issues trip command

19

OL Initiate

Overload protection issues trip command

20

UC Trip

Under current protection issues trip command

21

CBF Initiate

CBF function is initiated

22

CBF1 Trip

The first stage CBF issues trip command

23

CBF2 Trip

The second stage CBF issues trip command

24

Dead Zone Trip

The dead zone function issues trip command

25

OC Startup

Three stages over current protections startup

26

OC Startup Back

Three stages over current protections return

2.2

Alarm report list


Two kinds of alarm report are included in the IED, which are shown in the
following table:

Alarm I is severe alarm. When alarm I happens, the alarm LED on the
front panel of the IED will flash, all of protection function will be out of
service and the trip power of protection will be blocked by the IED.

Alarm II is other alarm. When alarm II happens, the alarm LED on the
front panel of the IED will flash (except BI Set SetGr2 and BI Set
SetGr1), and will not block the trip power of protection.
Table 198 Alarm I list

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

AD Error

AD is abnormal

BO Abnormal

Binary output is abnormal

EPROM Error

EPROM is abnormal

Flash Error

Flash is abnormal

Invalid SetGr

Pointer of setting group is error

277

Chapter 24 Appendix

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

Logic Scheme ERR

Logic file and CPU file not cooperate

RAM Error

RAM is abnormal

Setting Chk ERR

Setting value is error

Zero Offset

Zero deviation is out of limitation


Table 199 Alarm II list for M1

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description
Displacement voltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm

3V01 Alarm

3V02 Alarm

BI Set SetGr1

Setting group switches to 2 by binary input is 1

BI Set SetGr2

Setting group switches to 1 by binary input is 0

BIO COM ERR

Communication failure in BIO module

BIO OUT ERR

BO error in BIO module

CB Faulty

CB Not Ready

BI2 is active to indicate CB is not ready

CT Fail

Failure in circuit of current transformer

10

DS Faulty

Both DS Open and DS Close are active or inactive

11

EF Inv Alarm

Earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

12

EF1 Alarm

Earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

13

ES Faulty

Both ES Open and ES Close are active or inactive

14

File ERR

Read configuration files error

15

Frequency Differ

16

GOO_A_CFG_ERR

Configuration failure in GOOSE A

17

GOO_A_COMMU_ERR

Communication failure in GOOSE A

18

GOO_B_CFG_ERR

Configuration failure in GOOSE B

19

GOO_B_COMMU_ERR

Communication failure in GOOSE B

20

MMI Com Fail

Communication failure between MMI module and CPU

21

NSOC Inv Alarm

22

NSOC1 Alarm

23

OC Inv Alarm

24

OC1 Alarm

Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

25

OV1 Alarm

Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

26

PhA Grounded

Phase A is grounded

278

signal
Displacement voltage protection stage 2 issues an alarm
signal

Both the 3Ph CB Open and 3Ph CB Close are active or


inactive

Frequency derived from software and hardware are


different by 0.5Hz

Negative sequence current protection inverse stage issues


an alarm signal
Negative sequence current protection stage 1 issues an
alarm signal
Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues an alarm
signal

Chapter 24 Appendix

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

27

PhB Grounded

Phase B is grounded

28

PhC Grounded

Phase C is grounded

29

SEF Inv Alarm

30

SEF1 Alarm

31

SEF2 Alarm

32

Therm OL Alarm

Thermal overload protection issues an alarm signal

33

Trip Fail

Trip command is issued lasting for more than 9s

34

UV1 Alarm

Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

35

V1P VT Fail

VT failure in circuit of the forth voltage transformer

36

VT Fail

VT failure in circuit of voltage transformer

Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues an


alarm signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm
signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues an alarm
signal

Table 200 Alarm II list for M6

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description

BI Set SetGr1

Setting group switches to 2 by binary input is 1

BI Set SetGr2

Setting group switches to 1 by binary input is 0

BIO COM ERR

Communication failure in BIO module

BIO OUT ERR

BO error in BIO module

CB Faulty

CT Fail

Failure in circuit of current transformer

DS Faulty

Both DS Open and DS Close are active or inactive

EF Inv Alarm

Earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

EF1 Alarm

Earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

10

ES Faulty

Both ES Open and ES Close are active or inactive

11

File ERR

Read configuration files error

12

Frequency Differ

13

GOO_A_CFG_ERR

Configuration failure in GOOSE A

14

GOO_A_COMMU_ERR

Communication failure in GOOSE A

15

GOO_B_CFG_ERR

Configuration failure in GOOSE B

16

GOO_B_COMMU_ERR

Communication failure in GOOSE B

17

HMI Com Fail

Communication failure between HMI module and CPU

18

OC Inv Alarm

19

OC1 Alarm

20

SEF Inv Alarm

Both the 3Ph CB Open and 3Ph CB Close are active or


inactive

Frequency derived from software and hardware are


different by 0.5Hz

Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues an alarm


signal
Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues an
alarm signal

279

Chapter 24 Appendix

21

SEF1 Alarm

22

SEF2 Alarm

23

Trip Fail

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm


signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues an alarm
signal
Trip command is issued lasting for more than 9s
Table 201 Alarm II list for C1

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description
Displacement voltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm

3V01 Alarm

3V02 Alarm

BI Set SetGr1

Setting group switches to 2 by binary input is 1

BI Set SetGr2

Setting group switches to 1 by binary input is 0

BIO COM ERR

Communication failure in DIO module

BIO OUT ERR

BO error in BIO module

CB Faulty

CT Fail

Failure in circuit of current transformer

DS Faulty

Both DS Open and DS Close are active or inactive

10

EF Inv Alarm

Earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

11

EF1 Alarm

Earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

12

ES Faulty

Both ES Open and ES Close are active or inactive

13

File ERR

Read configuration files wrong

14

Frequency Differ

15

GOO_A_CFG_ERR

Configuration failure in GOOSE A

16

GOO_A_COMMU_ERR

Communication failure in GOOSE A

17

GOO_B_CFG_ERR

Configuration failure in GOOSE B

18

GOO_B_COMMU_ERR

Communication failure in GOOSE B

19

HMI Com Fail

Communication failure between HMI module and CPU

20

Inhibit close

Drive a contact to inhibit reconnection of capacitor

21

OC Inv Alarm

22

OC1 Alarm

Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

23

OL Alarm

Overload protection issues an alarm signal

24

OV1 Alarm

Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

25

PhA Grounded

Phase A is grounded

26

PhB Grounded

Phase B is grounded

27

PhC Grounded

Phase C is grounded

28

SEF Inv Alarm

Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues an

280

signal
Displacement voltage protection stage 2 issues an alarm
signal

Both 3Ph CB Open and 3Ph CB Close both active or


inactive

Frequency derived from software and hardware are


different by 0.5Hz

Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues an alarm


signal

Chapter 24 Appendix

No.

Abbr. (LCD Display)

Description
alarm signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm

29

SEF1 Alarm

30

SEF2 Alarm

31

Trip Fail

Trip command is issued lasting for more than 9s

32

UBL Alarm

Unbalance protection issues an alarm signal

33

UV1 Alarm

Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

34

V1p VT Fail

VT failure in circuit of the forth voltage transformer

35

VT Fail

VT failure in circuit of voltage transformer

signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues an alarm
signal

281

Chapter 24 Appendix

Typical connection

A. For incoming or outgoing feeder protection or line backup


protection
A
B
C
AIM2
I01
I02

IA

I03
I04

IB

I05
I06

IC

I07
I08

IN

Figure 70 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents

282

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01
I02

IA

I03
I04

IB

I05
I06

IC

I07
I08

IN

Figure 71 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents and
three phase voltages (bus side)

283

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM2
U01
U02
U03
U04

UA
UB
UC
UN

Figure 72 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents and
three phase voltages (line side)

284

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01
I02

IA

I03
I04

IB

I05
I06

IC

I07
I08

IN

Figure 73 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents and
single phase voltage (Ph-Ph) (bus side)

285

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC

U02
U03
U04

UN

AIM2
I01
I02

IA

I03
I04

IB

I05
I06

IC

I07
I08

IN

Figure 74 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents and
single phase voltage (Ph-E) (bus side)

286

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM1
I01

I1
I02

Figure 75 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current,
and sensitive earth current

287

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM1
*

I01

I1
I02

Figure 76 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current
and sensitive earth current, and three phase voltages (bus side)

288

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM1
*

I01

I1
I02

Figure 77 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current
and sensitive earth current, and three phase voltages (line side)

289

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM1
*

I01

I1
I02

Figure 78 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current
and sensitive earth current, and single phase voltage (Ph-Ph) (bus side)

290

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM1
*

I01

I1
I02

Figure 79 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current,
and sensitive earth current, and single phase voltage (Ph-E) (bus side)

291

Chapter 24 Appendix
B. For transformer backup protection
A
B
C
AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM1
*

I01
I02

I1

Figure 80 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current, and neutral current

292

Chapter 24 Appendix
A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM1
*

I01
I02

I1

Figure 81 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current and neutral current, and three phase voltages (bus side)

293

Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM1
*

I01
I02

I1

Figure 82 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current and neutral current, and three phase voltages (line side)

294

Chapter 24 Appendix
A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM1
*

I01
I02

I1

Figure 83 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current and neutral current, and single phase voltage (Ph-Ph) (bus side)

295

Chapter 24 Appendix
A
B
C
AIM2
U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01

IA

I02
I03

IB

I04

I05

IC

I06
I07

IN

I08

AIM1
*

I01
I02

I1

Figure 84 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current and neutral current, and single phase voltage (Ph-E) (bus side)

296

Chapter 24 Appendix
C. For synch-check function
A
B
C
A
B
C

AIM2
U05

U4
U06

U01
U02
U03
U04

UA
UB
UC
UN

Figure 85 Typical connection for synch-check on bus coupler applications

297

Chapter 24 Appendix
A
B
C
AIM2
U05

U4
U06

U01

UA
UB
UC
UN

U02
U03
U04

AIM2
I01
I02

IA

I03
I04

IB

I05
I06

IC

I07
I08

IN

Figure 86 Typical connection for synch-check and feeder current protection

298

Chapter 24 Appendix
D. For capacitor bank protection
A
B
C

AIM1

Capacitor bank

I03

IC1

I04

I05

IC2

I06

I07

IC3

I08

Figure 87 Typical connection for capacitor bank unbalanced current protection with three
current inputs

A
B
C

AIM1

Capacitor bank
U03
U04

UC1

U05
U06

UC2

U07
U08

UC3

Figure 88 Typical connection for capacitor bank unbalanced voltage protection with three
voltage inputs

299

Chapter 24 Appendix
A
B
C

AIM1

Capacitor bank
I03

IC1

I04

*
I05

IC2

I06
I07

IC3

I08

Figure 89 Typical connection for capacitor bank unbalanced current protection with one
current input

A
B
C

AIM1

Capacitor bank

U03
U04

UC1

U05
U06

UC2

U07
U08

UC3

Figure 90 Typical connection for capacitor bank unbalanced voltage protection with one
voltage input

300

Chapter 24 Appendix
A
B
C

A
B
C

I1
I1
I2
I3

Figure 91 Unbalanced current detection for


grounded capacitor bank

Figure 94 Three unbalanced currents


A
B
C

detection for capacitor bank


A
B
C

I1

U1

Figure 92 Neutral current differential


protection for grounded Split-Wye capacitor

Figure 95 Neutral voltage unbalanced

bank

protection for unrounded Wye capacitor


bank

A
B
C

A
B
C

I1

U1
Figure 93 Neutral current protection for
ungrounded split-Wye capacitor bank
Figure 96 Neutral voltage unbalanced
detection for ungrounded split-Wye
capacitor bank

301

Chapter 24 Appendix
A
B
C

A
B
C

U1

U1

Figure 99 Neutral voltage protection for


ungrounded split-Wye capacitor bank

Figure 97 Summation of Intermediate


tap-point voltage for grounded Wye
capacitor bank

A
B
C

A
B
C

U1
U2
U3

U1

Figure 100 Three unbalanced voltages


Figure 98 Neutral voltage unbalance
detection by 3VTs for unrounded Wye
capacitor bank

302

detection for Capacitor Bank

Chapter 24 Appendix
E. For Load shedding function

CSC-211

CSC-211

CSC-211

CSC-211

CSC-211

Figure 101 Typical connection for load shedding function

303

Chapter 24 Appendix

Time inverse characteristic

4.1

11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time


characteristic curves
In the setting, if the curve number is set for inverse time characteristic, which
is corresponding to the characteristic curve in the following tabel. Both IEC
and ANSI based standard curves are available.
Table 202 11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic

Curves No.

4.2

IDMTL Curves

Parameter A

Parameter P

Parameter B

IEC INV.

0.14

0.02

IEC VERY INV.

13.5

1.0

IEC EXTERMELY INV.

80.0

2.0

IEC LONG INV.

120.0

1.0

ANSI INV.

8.9341

2.0938

0.17966

ANSI SHORT INV.

0.2663

1.2969

0.03393

ANSI LONG INV.

5.6143

2.18592

ANSI
INV.

0.0103

0.02

0.0228

ANSI VERY INV.

3.922

2.0

0.0982

10

ANSI EXTERMELY INV.

5.64

2.0

0.02434

11

ANSI DEFINITE INV.

0.4797

1.5625

0.21359

MODERATELY

User defined characteristic


For the inverse time characteristic, also can be set as user defined
characteristic if the setting is set to 12.

Equation 11

304

Chapter 24 Appendix
where:
A: Time factor for inverse time stage
B: Delay time for inverse time stage
P: index for inverse time stage
T: Set time multiplier for step n

4.3

Typical inverse curves

305

Chapter 24 Appendix
The typical 11 curves where K=0.025 is shown in the following figure:

IEC & ANSI Curve


(K=0.025)
10

0.1
Time in Seconds

IEC INV.
IEC VERY INV.
IEC EXTE INV.
IEC LONG INV.
ANSI INV.
ANSI SHORT INV.
ANSI LONG INV.
ANSI MODE INV.

0.01

ANSI VERY INV.


ANSI EXTE INV.
ANSI DEFI INV.

0.001

0.0001
1

10

100

Id/I_Inv

Figure 102 Typical curves for IEC and ANSI standard

306

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the IEC INV. Curve in the
following figure:

IEC INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1.0
K=1.25
0.1

0.01
1

10

100

I/Is

Figure 103 Typical IEC INV. Curves

307

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the IEC VERY INV. Curve in
the following figure:

IEC VERY INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2

0.1

K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1

10
I/Is

Figure 104 Typical IEC VERY INV. Curves

308

100

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the IEC EXTREMELY INV.
Curve in the following figure:

IEC EXTREMELY INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2

0.1

K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1

10

100

I/Is

Figure 105 Typical IEC EXTREMELY INV. Curve

309

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the IEC LONG INV. Curve in
the following figure:

IEC LONG INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5
0.1

0.01
1

10
I/Is

Figure 106 Typical IEC LONG INV. Curve

310

100

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ASNI INV. Curve in the
following figure:

ANSI INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1

K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1

10

100
I/Is

Figure 107 Typical ANSI INV. Curves

311

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI SHOTR INV. Curve
in the following figure:

ANSI SHORT INV.Curve


10

Time in Seconds

0.1
K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1

0.0001

10

100

I/Is
Figure 108 Typical ANSI SHORT INV. Curves

312

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI LONG INV. Curve in
the following figure:

ANSI LONG INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5
0.1

0.01
1

10

100

I/Is

Figure 109 Typical ANSI LONG INV. Curves

313

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI MODETATELY INV.
Curve in the following figure:

ANSI MODERATELY INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1

K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1

10
I/Is

Figure 110 Typical ANSI MODETATELY INV. Curve

314

100

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSIVERY INV. Curve in
the following figure:

ANSI VERY INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1

K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1

10

100

I/Is

Figure 111 Typical ANSI VERY INV. Curves

315

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI EXTREMELY INV.
Curve in the following figure:

ANSI EXTREMELY INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

0.1
K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
0.01

K=1.5

0.001
1

0.0001

10

I/Is

Figure 112 Typical ANSI EXTREMELY INV. Curves

316

100

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI DEFINITE INV.
Curve in the following figure:

ANSI DEFINITE INV. Curve


10

Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1

K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1

10

100

I/Is

Figure 113 Typical ANSI DEFINITE INV. Curves

CT Requirement

5.1

Overview
317

Chapter 24 Appendix
In practice, the conventional magnetic- core current transformer (hereinafter
as referred CT) is not able to transform the current signal accurately in whole
fault period of all possible faults because of manufactured cost and
installation space limited. CT Saturation will cause distortion of the current
signal and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of
some functions. Although more and more protection IEDs have been
designed to permit CT saturation with maintained correct operation, the
performance of protection IED is still depended on the correct selection of CT.

5.2

Current transformer classification


The conventional CTs are usually manufactured in accordance with the
standard, IEC 60044, ANSI / IEEE C57.13, ANSI / IEEE C37.110 or other
comparable standards, which CTs are specified in different protection class.
Currently, the CT for protection are classified according to functional
performance as follows:
Class P CT
Accuracy limit defined by composite error with steady symmetric primary
current. No limit for remanent flux.
Class PR CT
CT with limited remanence factor for which, in some cased, a value of the
secondary loop time constant and/or a limiting value of the winding
resistance may also be specified.
Class PX CT
Low leakage reactance for which knowledge of the transformer
secondary excitation characteristic, secondary winding resistance,
secondary burden resistance and turns ratio is sufficient to assess its
performance in relation to the protective relay system with which it is to
be used.
Class TPS CT
Low leakage flux current transient transformer for which performance is
defined by the secondary excitation characteristics and turns ratio error
limits. No limit for remanent flux
Class TPX CT
Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous error during specified
transient duty cycle. No limit for remanent flux.
Class TPY CT
Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous error during specified

318

Chapter 24 Appendix
transient duty cycle. Remanent flux not to exceed 10% of the saturation
flux..
Class TPZ CT
Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous alternating current
component error during single energization with maximum d.c. offset at
specified secondary loop time constant. No requirements for d.c.
component error limit. Remanent flux to be practically negligible.
TPE class CT (TPE represents transient protection and electronic type
CT)

5.3

Abbreviations (according to IEC 60044-1, -6, as


defined)
Abbrev.

Description

Esl

Rated secondary limiting e.m.f

Eal

Rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f

Ek

Rated knee point e.m.f

Uk

Knee point voltage (r.m.s.)

Kalf

Accuracy limit factor

Kssc

Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor

Kssc

Effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor

Kssc

based on different Ipcf

Kpcf

Protective checking factor

Ks

Specified transient factor

Kx

Dimensioning factor

Ktd

Transient dimensioning factor

Ipn

Rated primary current

Isn

Rated secondary current

Ipsc

Rated primary short-circuit current

Ipcf

protective checking current

Isscmax

Maximum symmetrical short-circuit current

Rct

Secondary winding d.c. resistance at 75 C /


167 F (or other specified temperature)

Rb

Rated resistive burden

Rb

= Rlead + Rrelay = actual connected resistive


burden

Rs

Total resistance of the secondary circuit,


inclusive of the secondary winding resistance
corrected to 75, unless otherwise specified,
and inclusive of all external burden connected.

Rlead

Wire loop resistance

Zbn

Rated relay burden

319

Chapter 24 Appendix
Zb

Actual relay burden

Tp

Specified primary time constant

Ts

Secondary loop time constant

5.4

General current transformer requirements

5.4.1

Protective checking current


The current error of CT should be within the accuracy limit required at
specified fault current.
To verify the CT accuracy performance, Ipcf, primary protective checking
current, should be chose properly and carefully.
For different protections, Ipcf is the selected fault current in proper fault
position of the corresponding fault, which will flow through the verified CT.
To guarantee the reliability of protection relay, Ipcf should be the maximum
fault current at internal fault. E.g. maximum primary three phase short-circuit
fault current or single phase earth fault current depended on system
sequence impedance, in different positions.
Moreover, to guarantee the security of protection relay, Ipcf should be the
maximum fault current at external fault.
Last but not least, Ipcf calculation should be based on the future possible
system power capacity
Kpcf, protective checking factor, is always used to verified the CT
performance

To reduce the influence of transient state, Kalf, Accuracy limit factor of CT,
should be larger than the following requirement

Ks, Specified transient factor, should be decided based on actual operation


state and operation experiences by user.

5.4.2
320

CT class

Chapter 24 Appendix
The selected CT should guarantee that the error is within the required
accuracy limit at steady symmetric short circuit current. The influence of short
circuit current DC component and remanence should be considered, based
on extent of system transient influence, protection function characteristic,
consequence of transient saturation and actual operating experience. To fulfill
the requirement on a specified time to saturation, the rated equivalent
secondary e.m.f of CTs must higher than the required maximum equivalent
secondary e.m.f that is calculated based on actual application.
For the CTs applied to transmission line protection, transformer differential
protection with 330kV voltage level and above, and 300MW and above
generator-transformer set differential protection, the power system time
constant is so large that the CT is easy to saturate severely due to system
transient state. To prevent the CT from saturation at actual duty cycle, TP
class CT is preferred.
For TPS class CT, Eal (rated equivalent secondary limiting e.m.f) is generally
determined as follows:

Where
Ks: Specified transient factor
Kssc: Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
For TPX, TPY and TPZ class CT, Eal (rated equivalent secondary limiting
e.m.f) is generally determined as follows:

Where
Ktd: Rated transient dimensioning factor
Considering at short circuit current with 100% offset
For C-t-O duty cycle,

t: duration of one duty cycle;


For C-t-O-tfr-C-t-O duty cycle,

t: duration of first duty cycle;


t: duration of second duty cycle;
321

Chapter 24 Appendix
tfr: duration between two duty cycle;
For the CTs applied to 110 - 220kV voltage level transmission line protection,
110 - 220kV voltage level transformer differential protection, 100-200MW
generator-transformer set differential protection, and large capacity motor
differential protection, the influence of system transient state to CT is so less
that the CT selection is based on system steady fault state mainly, and leave
proper margin to tolerate the negative effect of possible transient state.
Therefore, P, PR, PX class CT can be always applied.
For P class and PR class CT, Esl (the rated secondary limited e.m.f) is
generally determined as follows:

Kalf: Accuracy limit factor


For PX class CT, Ek (rated knee point e.m.f) is generally determined as
follows:

Kx: Demensioning factor


For the CTs applied to protection for110kV voltage level and below system,
the CT should be selected based on system steady fault state condition. P
class CT is always applied.

5.4.3

Accuracy class
The CT accuracy class should guarantee that the protection relay applied is
able to operate correctly even at a very sensitive setting, e.g. for a sensitive
residual overcurrent protection. Generally, the current transformer should
have an accuracy class, which have an current error at rated primary current,
that is less than 1% (e.g. class 5P).
If current transformers with less accuracy are used it is advisable to check the
actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.

5.4.4

Ratio of CT
The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data
like e.g. maximum load. However, it should be verified that the current to the
protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to
be detected with the selected CT ratio. The minimum operating current is
different for different functions and settable normally. So each function should
be checked separately.

322

Chapter 24 Appendix
5.4.5

Rated secondary current


There are 2 standard rated secondary currents, 1A or 5A. Generally, 1 A
should be preferred, particularly in HV and EHV stations, to reduce the
burden of the CT secondary circuit. Because 5A rated CTs, i.e. I2R is 25x
compared to only 1x for a 1A CT. However, in some cases to reduce the CT
secondary circuit open voltage, 5A can be applied.

5.4.6

Secondary burden
Too high flux will result in CT saturation. The secondary e.m.f is directly
proportional to linked flux. To feed rated secondary current, CT need to
generate enough secondary e.m.f to feed the secondary burden.
Consequently, Higher secondary burden, need Higher secondary e.m.f, and
then closer to saturation. So the actual secondary burden Rb must be less
than the rated secondary burden Rb of applied CT, presented
Rb > Rb
The CT actual secondary burden Rb consists of wiring loop resistance Rlead
and the actual relay burdens Zb in whole secondary circuit, which is
calculated by following equation
Rb = Rlead + Zb
The rated relay burden, Zbn, is calculated as below:

Where
Sr: the burden of IED current input channel per phase, in VA;
For earth faults, the loop includes both phase and neutral wire, normally twice
the resistance of the single secondary wire. For three-phase faults the neutral
current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the resistance up to the
point where the phase wires are connected to the common neutral wire. The
most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it normally is
sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case.
In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the phase-to-earth fault is not
the considered dimensioning case and therefore the resistance of the single
secondary wire always can be used in the calculation, for this case.

5.5

Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f requirements


To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able
to correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin
323

Chapter 24 Appendix
to saturate.

5.5.1

Definite time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection


For TPY CT,
Kssc should be satisfied following requirement:

Where

Ipcf: Maximum primary fundamental frequency current at close-in


forward and reverse faults (A)
Ipcf: Maximum applied operating setting value (A)
Considering auto-reclosing operation, Eal should meet the following
requirement, at C-O-C-O duty cycle

Where
Ktd: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 1.2
recommended
For P Class and PR class CT,
Kalf should be satisfied following requirement:

Where

Ipcf: Maximum primary fundamental frequency current at close-in


forward and reverse faults (A)
Ipcf: Maximum applied operating setting value (A)
Esl can be verified as below:

324

Chapter 24 Appendix
Where
Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended
For PX class CT,
Ek should be verified based on below equation.

Where
Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended

5.5.2

Inverse time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection


For TPY CT,
Kssc should be satisfied following requirement:

Where

Ipcf: Maximum applied primary startup current setting value (A)


Considering auto-reclosing operation, Eal should meet the following
requirement, at C-O duty cycle

Where
Ktd: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 1.2
recommended
For P Class and PR class CT,
Kalf should be satisfied following requirement:

Where

Ipcf: Maximum applied primary startup current setting value (A)


325

Chapter 24 Appendix
Esl can be verified as below:

Where
Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended
For PX class CT,
Ek should be verified based on below equation.

Where
Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended

326

Anda mungkin juga menyukai